LCT Manual

Optical Multi Service
SMA1/4UC
Topic 5 (LCT Operator Manual)
Release 3.1
Table of Contents
Table of Contents...........................................................................1
List of Figures .............................................................................. 13
List of Tables................................................................................ 21
Chapter 1: Introduction................................................................23
1.1 Equipment Covered................................................................... 23
1.2 Software Functionality .............................................................. 23
1.2.1 Local Craft Terminal (LCT)/Local Craft Terminal Subsystem (LCTS) 23
1.3 How This Book Is Organised.................................................... 24
Chapter 2: LCT Presentation And Operation ............................. 25

2.1 Local Craft Terminal Opening Window.................................... 25
2.2 Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC Window............................... 26

2.2.1 Slot Status Icon .................................................................................. 27
2.3 Menu Selection And Data Entry ............................................... 28

2.3.1 Using the Keyboard ............................................................................ 28
2.3.2 Using the Mouse................................................................................. 29
2.3.3 Pushbuttons........................................................................................ 29
2.3.4 Error Messages .................................................................................. 30
2.4 SMA1/4UC Management, Control And Monitoring ................. 31
2.4.1 Menu Hierarchy .................................................................................. 31
2.4.2 Error Messages .................................................................................. 32
2.4.3 Warning Messages............................................................................. 33
Marconi Topic 5 1PHA60140AAH

Copyright- Refer to title page Page 1 Issue: 02
SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Release 3.1 Table of Contents
2.5 Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC Window Pop Up Menus ..... 33
2.6 Main Menu Procedure Arrangements ...................................... 33
2.7 Time-outs And Lock-ups .......................................................... 33
2.8 Print Function ............................................................................ 34
Chapter 3: LCT Software Installation.......................................... 35

3.1 Introduction ............................................................................... 35
3.1.1 Type of PC Required .......................................................................... 35
3.1.2 Installation of The PC ......................................................................... 36
3.1.3 Software Installation ........................................................................... 36
3.1.4 LCT Software Installation Procedure.................................................. 36
3.2 Installing New Comms And Controller Software .................... 37
3.2.1 Upgrade Procedure ............................................................................ 37
3.2.2 Software Download (LCT only) .......................................................... 38
3.2.3 View Software Download Header....................................................... 39
Chapter 4: LCT Log in.................................................................. 41

4.1 Run LCT Software ..................................................................... 41
4.2 Local Craft Terminal Screen Presentation .............................. 41
4.3 Log In.......................................................................................... 42
4.3.2 LCT Security....................................................................................... 42
4.3.3 Log In Procedure ................................................................................ 43
Chapter 5: Before Commissioning ............................................. 45

5.1 Introduction ............................................................................... 45
5.2 Pre-requisites ............................................................................ 45

5.2.1 SMA1/4UC.......................................................................................... 45
5.2.2 LCT Connection.................................................................................. 46
5.2.3 LCT Software...................................................................................... 46
Chapter 6: Commissioning.......................................................... 47
6.1 Introduction ............................................................................... 47

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
6.2 Start Commissioning ................................................................ 48
6.2.1 Controller Commissioning .................................................................. 48
6.2.2 Comms Commissioning...................................................................... 50
6.2.3 Transport Layer Configuration............................................................ 51
Chapter 7: After-Commissioning Procedures............................ 55

7.1 Introduction ............................................................................... 55
7.2 Remote NE Management .......................................................... 56
7.3 Back Up SDH/Card Configuration Data ................................... 57
7.4 Restore SDH/Card Configuration Data .................................... 59
7.5 Restore IS-IS Static Data........................................................... 60
Chapter 8: Card Pop-Up Menus .................................................. 63

8.1 Introduction ............................................................................... 63
8.2 1+1 MSP ..................................................................................... 65
8.3 Inter-card 1+1 MSP .................................................................... 66
8.4 Intra-card 1+1 MSP .................................................................... 66
8.5 Tributary 1+1 MSP ..................................................................... 67

Create 1+1 MSP Protection ............................................................................... 67
Amend 1+1 MSP Protection .............................................................................. 72
Delete 1+1 MSP Protection ............................................................................... 74
Core Card Protection ......................................................................................... 75
Alarms - Source Active Alarms .......................................................................... 76
Alarms - All Intermittent Alarms ......................................................................... 77
Alarm Inversion .................................................................................................. 77
Analogue Monitoring (STM-1/4Lines Only)........................................................ 78
Bank Status........................................................................................................ 78
Upgrade NE ....................................................................................................... 80
Set Bank Status ................................................................................................. 81
Global>Download .............................................................................................. 82

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Partition ............................................................................................................ 82
Switch Banks ..................................................................................................... 82
Align Banks ........................................................................................................ 83
Delete Bank ....................................................................................................... 83
Card Forced Restoration ................................................................................... 84
Connect to Test Bus (2M Units on Core Cards only) ........................................ 84
Inventory ............................................................................................................ 85
LED User Override............................................................................................. 86
LED Test ............................................................................................................ 86
8.6 Optical Module Configuration (Flexible Dual STM-1) ............. 87
Re-configure Card/unit....................................................................................... 89
Reset Card/unit .................................................................................................. 89
Set Default Card Configuration.......................................................................... 90
Signal Label Configuration................................................................................. 90
STM-1 to STM-4 Upgrade ................................................................................. 91
Ethernet Domain (Packetspan cards)................................................................ 92
Chapter 9: File Menu.................................................................... 95

Log Out ............................................................................................................ 95
Exit ............................................................................................................ 95
Chapter 10: Configuration Menu................................................. 98

Configuration...................................................................................................... 99
1:N Tributary Protection ................................................................................... 100
Core Tributary Protection (SMA1/4UC) ........................................................... 103
Details .......................................................................................................... 104
10.1 Inventory Details...................................................................... 105

Adopt New Units .............................................................................................. 105
NE Name ......................................................................................................... 106
SNC Persistency.............................................................................................. 106
Section SD Configuration ................................................................................ 107

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Path SD Configuration ..................................................................................... 108
Port SD Configuration ...................................................................................... 109
MSP Protection ................................................................................................ 110
Path Protection ................................................................................................ 110
Port Protection ................................................................................................. 111
Alarm Configuration State................................................................................ 112
Set NSSC Real Card Types ............................................................................ 112
Transport Layer................................................................................................ 113
Gateway Interface............................................................................................ 114
Network Layer Configuration ........................................................................... 115
IS-IS/ES-IS System Configuration ................................................................... 118
10.2 DCC IS-IS Metrics .................................................................... 120
DCC IS-IS Metrics............................................................................................ 120
Set DCC IS-IS Metrics and IS-IS/ES-IS System Config to Default ................. 121
Reachable Address Prefixes (RAP)................................................................. 122
Amend Reachable Address Prefix................................................................... 124
Delete Reachable Address Prefix.................................................................... 125
Manual Adjacencies......................................................................................... 125
Create Manual Adjacency................................................................................ 126
Amend Manual Adjacency ............................................................................... 127
Delete Manual Adjacency ................................................................................ 128
Performance Counts - Global .......................................................................... 128
Performance Counts - Per DCC Interface ....................................................... 129
Clear Comms Performance Counts - Per DCC Interface ................................ 130
Message Based Persistency Thresholds......................................................... 131
Time Based Persistency Thresholds ............................................................... 132
Level 1 Routing Tables .................................................................................... 132
Level 2 Routing Tables .................................................................................... 134
CLNS Ping ....................................................................................................... 135
DCC Configuration - Working .......................................................................... 136

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Amending the Working DCC Configuration ..................................................... 137
DCC Configuration - Default ............................................................................ 138
Amending the Default DCC Configuration ....................................................... 139
LAPD Configuration - Working......................................................................... 140
Amending the Working LAPD Configuration ................................................... 141
LAPD Configuration - Default .......................................................................... 142
Amending the Default LAPD Configuration ..................................................... 143
SETG Synchronisation Parameters................................................................. 144
Single Synchronisation Timing Generation (SETG) Mode .............................. 145
External/Tributary Timing Source .................................................................... 147
Diagnostic Reset.............................................................................................. 150
AIS Injection..................................................................................................... 151
SOH Byte Bypass ............................................................................................ 152
Auxiliary Overhead Byte .................................................................................. 153
Interworking Criterion....................................................................................... 154
Date and Time ................................................................................................. 155
Change Password - LCT User......................................................................... 155
LCT User Admin .............................................................................................. 156
Add User .......................................................................................................... 157
Change LCT User Password ........................................................................... 158
Delete User ...................................................................................................... 158
Set EM Password ............................................................................................ 159
Security Settings .............................................................................................. 160
Chapter 11: Fault Management Menu ....................................... 161

11.1 Alarm Event Criteria ................................................................ 161
11.2 Status Event Criteria ............................................................... 162
11.2.1 Status Events-Resource................................................................... 163
11.2.2 Status Events-Management ............................................................. 164
11.2.3 Current Status Events Log ............................................................... 164

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
NE Alarm Event Configuration......................................................................... 164
User Input Alarms ............................................................................................ 166
All Disabled Alarms.......................................................................................... 167
All Inhibited Alarms .......................................................................................... 168
Alarm Persistence............................................................................................ 168
Fault Action ...................................................................................................... 170
Event Detection Thresholds............................................................................. 172
Diagnostic Alarm Persistency .......................................................................... 173
Alarm Audible Warning .................................................................................... 174
Status Audible Warning ................................................................................... 174
Performance Audible Warning......................................................................... 175
LED Global Inhibit ............................................................................................ 175
Alarm Bus Driver.............................................................................................. 176
Cancel All Local Alarms................................................................................... 177
Historic Alarm Log............................................................................................ 177
Historic Alarm Log Filter................................................................................... 178
Intermittent Historic Alarm Log ........................................................................ 179
Historic Status Event Log ................................................................................ 180
Historic Status Event Log Filter ....................................................................... 181
Historic Performance Event Log ...................................................................... 181
NE Historic Performance Event Log Filter ....................................................... 182
Inhibited Historic Performance Event Log ....................................................... 182
Current Status Event Log ................................................................................ 183
Current Performance Event Log ...................................................................... 183
Configure Log Attributes .................................................................................. 184
Log Capacity Alarm Threshold ........................................................................ 185
Display Graphical Alarms ................................................................................ 186
Refresh Graphical Alarms................................................................................ 187
Chapter 12: Status Menu ........................................................... 189

Set NE Online/offline........................................................................................ 189

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Remote NE Management ................................................................................ 191
Decommission NE ........................................................................................... 191
Chapter 13: Connections Menu................................................. 193

Display Cross-connections .............................................................................. 193
13.1.1 Cross-Connection Details Screen .................................................... 194
13.2 File Menu.................................................................................. 195
13.3 Card Menu................................................................................ 195
HOVC Config (HO Path Trace Configuration) ................................................. 195
Section Configuration....................................................................................... 199
Card Performance Reports .............................................................................. 202
Card UAT/CSES Performance Records .......................................................... 204
Card Performance Exception Thresholds........................................................ 205
Section Overhead Byte Values........................................................................ 206
13.3.1 Loopbacks ........................................................................................ 207
Error Injection................................................................................................... 208
PRBS Injection................................................................................................. 209
STM-N Card PRBS Detection.......................................................................... 210
13.4 Path Menu ................................................................................ 211

Set Admin State ............................................................................................... 211
Create Cross-connection - Point To Point ....................................................... 212
Supervisory Un-equipped Connections ........................................................... 214
Configure Supervisory Un-equipped Connections .......................................... 215
Delete Supervisory Un-equipped Connections................................................ 217
Supervisory Unequipped - Admin State........................................................... 218
Broadcast (Multi-point) Cross-connections...................................................... 219
Delete Cross-connection ................................................................................. 221
Create/Amend SNC Protection (VC-12, VC-2, VC-3 ,VC-4) ........................... 222
Delete SNC Protection (VC-12, VC-2, VC-3 and VC-4) .................................. 227
Swap Worker/Protection (VC-12, VC-2, VC-3 and VC-4)................................ 228

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
VC Configuration.............................................................................................. 228
Through Path Configuration............................................................................. 230
Path Overhead Byte Values (PDH) ................................................................. 232
Path Performance Reports .............................................................................. 233
Path UAT/CSES Performance Records .......................................................... 236
Path Performance Exception Thresholds ........................................................ 237
Display Through Path Traffic ........................................................................... 238
Through Path Synchronisation ........................................................................ 239
Select Through Path Traffic ............................................................................. 240
Select Through Path Synchronisation ............................................................. 241
13.5 Port ........................................................................................... 242
Port Configurations .......................................................................................... 244
Connected Port Configuration (LO Path Trace Config) ................................... 247
2M Output Buffer Timing Configuration ........................................................... 249
Wander Buffer Synchronisation Source........................................................... 251
CRC-4 Monitoring ............................................................................................ 253
CRC-4 Insertion ............................................................................................... 254
Create/Amend Port Protection......................................................................... 256
Delete Port Protection...................................................................................... 258
Chapter 14: Performance Menu ................................................ 261

Set 24 Hour End Time ..................................................................................... 261
Clear Performance Reports ............................................................................. 262
Performance Thresholds ................................................................................. 263
Default Performance Thresholds ..................................................................... 263
Synchronisation Thresholds ............................................................................ 264
CSES Performance Report Thresholds........................................................... 264
Trib Input SES Thresholds............................................................................... 265
Scheduled Reporting Delay State.................................................................... 265

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Chapter 15: NE Configuration ................................................... 267

15.1 Initial Configuration................................................................. 267
15.2 SMC Bank Status..................................................................... 268
15.3 Synchronisation ...................................................................... 269
15.4 Core Line Card Sync–Destination ID Configuration............. 270
15.5 Disable Fault Action for PDH Trib Input AIS ......................... 270
15.6 Disable Diagnostic Reset Function........................................ 271
15.7 Real Time Clock....................................................................... 271
15.8 Set NE On Line ........................................................................ 271
15.9 Unit Software Inventory .......................................................... 271
Chapter 16: Functional Checks At SMA1/4UC Nodes ............. 273

16.1 Optical Launch Power............................................................. 273
16.2 Alarms ...................................................................................... 273
16.2.1 Alarm CLEAR Check ........................................................................ 273
16.2.2 Expected Alarms .............................................................................. 274
16.3 Cross Connections to Line West/Line East .......................... 274
16.4 Viewing/Clearing the Event Logs ........................................... 275
16.5 Loss of Signal Alarm and Error Free Check ......................... 275
16.5.1 64x2 Mbit/s Core Trib Card or 3x34/45 Mb/s Generic Trib with 75W
Unbalanced Terminations. ............................................................... 275
Balanced Terminations..................................................................... 276
16.5.3 2048 Kbit/s HDB3 2^15-1 PRBS for 2Mbit/s Trib cards. .................. 277
16.5.4 Testing an STM-1 Tributary.............................................................. 279
16.5.5 Testing an STM-4 Tributary.............................................................. 279
16.5.6 Testing an STM-4 VC4-4c/v Tributary.............................................. 280
16.5.7 Testing a 34Mbit/s Transmux ........................................................... 281
16.6 Packetspan Card Tests ........................................................... 281
16.7 Core Card Protection Test ...................................................... 281

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
16.8 Equipment protection ............................................................. 282
16.8.1 2Mbit/s 1:1 Core Tributary Protection............................................... 282
16.8.2 34/45 Mb/s Generic Tributary 1:N Protection ................................... 282
16.8.3 1:N Generic Tributary Protection Test.............................................. 283
16.9 Maintenance Spares................................................................ 284
16.10 Completion of In-Station Testing ........................................... 284
Chapter 17: Subnetwork SMA1/4UC Integration...................... 285

17.1 MV 36 Communication ............................................................ 285
17.1.1 Static Routing Tables ....................................................................... 285
17.1.2 Comms Configuration....................................................................... 285
17.1.3 IS-IS Configuration ........................................................................... 287
17.2 NE Synchronisation ................................................................ 287
17.3 Test Path Configuration.......................................................... 287
17.4 Alarm Configuration................................................................ 287
17.4.1 Alarm Amendment Procedure .......................................................... 288
17.5 Alarm Reports to Network Manager....................................... 288
17.6 Receive Optical Power ............................................................ 288
17.6.1 Dual Fibre Operation ........................................................................ 288
17.6.2 Single Fibre Operation...................................................................... 289
17.7 Error Free Checks ................................................................... 290
17.8 STM-n 1+1 MSP Protection ..................................................... 290

17.8.1 LINE STM-n 1+1 MSP...................................................................... 291
17.8.2 GENERIC TRIBUTARY STM-n 1+1 MSP........................................ 291
17.8.3 Configure STM-n 1+1 MSP .............................................................. 291
17.8.4 STM-N 1+1 MSP Test ...................................................................... 291
17.9 EOW Operation........................................................................ 292
17.10 Power failure Test.................................................................... 292
17.11 Completion of Subnetwork Integration ................................. 293

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
17.12 Example Subnetwork .............................................................. 294
17.12.1 Methods of Single Fibre Operation................................................... 295
Chapter 18: Subnetwork Tests.................................................. 297

18.1 SNCP Path Protection ............................................................. 297
18.1.1 Test Path Set-up............................................................................... 297
18.1.2 Path Disconnections......................................................................... 297
18.2 Synchronisation Switching .................................................... 298
18.2.1 Test Set-up ....................................................................................... 299
18.2.2 Fibre Disconnections ........................................................................ 299
18.2.3 External Sync Source Failures ......................................................... 300
18.2.4 Holdover Mode Test ......................................................................... 300
18.3 Performance Test(s)................................................................ 301
18.3.1 Subnetwork Performance Test......................................................... 301
18.3.2 Integrated Subnetwork Performance Test ....................................... 301
18.4 Element Manager Comms....................................................... 302
18.5 Completion of Testing............................................................. 302
Chapter 19: EOW Unit SMA1/4 UC ............................................ 303

19.1 Installation and Configuration of the Unit ............................. 303
19.1.1 Installation Procedure....................................................................... 303
19.1.2 Configuration Procedure................................................................... 304
19.2 Operation and Feature Description........................................ 307
19.2.1 Boot Mode ........................................................................................ 307
19.2.2 Application Mode (Main Screen) ...................................................... 308
19.2.3 Normal Operation of the EOW ......................................................... 311
19.3 Unit Level Fault Finding.......................................................... 313

19.3.1 Built-in Diagnostics ........................................................................... 313
19.3.2 Fundamental Problems .................................................................... 314
19.3.3 Operational Problems....................................................................... 314

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Release 3.1 List of Figures
List of Figures
Figure 2-1: LCT Opening Window............................................................................................... 25
Figure 2-2: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC Window - Accessed via LCT ............................... 27
Figure 2-3: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC Window Menu...................................................... 28
Figure 2-4: Set Filter.................................................................................................................... 28
Figure 2-5: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC Window - Configuration Menu............................. 31
Figure 2-6: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC Window - Fault Management Menu .................... 31
Figure 2-7: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC Window - Status Menu (LCT).............................. 32
Figure 2-8: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC Window - Connections Menu .............................. 32
Figure 2-9: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC Window - Performance Menu.............................. 32
Figure 2-10: Warning Action Screen ........................................................................................... 33
Figure 2-11: Print Options ........................................................................................................... 34
Figure 3-1: LCT Windows Desktop Shortcut Icon (32Bit) ........................................................... 37
Figure 3-2: NE Software Install.................................................................................................... 38
Figure 4-1: LCT Opening Window............................................................................................... 41
Figure 4-2: Login ......................................................................................................................... 43
Figure 6-1: Commissioning Sequence ........................................................................................ 47
Figure 6-2: Set Commissioning Parameters ............................................................................... 48
Figure 6-3: SMA1/4UC ................................................................................................................ 49
Figure 6-4: Transport Layer Configuration Screen...................................................................... 51
Figure 6-5: Gateway Interface Configuration .............................................................................. 52
Figure 6-6: Set Network Address ................................................................................................ 53
Figure 7-1: Restoring Configuration Data.................................................................................... 55
Figure 7-2: Remote NE Management ......................................................................................... 57
Figure 8-1: Example Card Pop-up Menu..................................................................................... 63
Figure 8-2: STM-1 1+1 MSP ....................................................................................................... 68
Figure 8-3: MSP Selection........................................................................................................... 69
Figure 8-4: Select STM-1 MSP for Amendment.......................................................................... 72

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Figure 8-5: 1+1MSP Amend Protection State ............................................................................. 73
Figure 8-6: Select STM-1 MSP for Deletion ................................................................................ 74
Figure 8-7: Delete 1+1 MSP Card Protection.............................................................................. 74
Figure 8-8: Core Card Pop-up Menu (Core Card Protection Highlighted) .................................. 75
Figure 8-9: Source Active Alarms................................................................................................ 76
Figure 8-10: Intermittent Alarms.................................................................................................. 77
Figure 8-11: Alarm Inversion Screen........................................................................................... 77
Figure 8-12: STM-4 Analogue Monitoring ................................................................................... 78
Figure 8-13: Software Bank Status ............................................................................................. 79
Figure 8-14: Bank Status> Global Screen................................................................................... 80
Figure 8-15: Set Bank Status Screen.......................................................................................... 81
Figure 8-16: Switch Banks .......................................................................................................... 83
Figure 8-17: Align Banks ............................................................................................................. 83
Figure 8-18: Delete Bank............................................................................................................. 83
Figure 8-19: Connect To Test Bus .............................................................................................. 84
Figure 8-20: Hardware Inventory................................................................................................. 85
Figure 8-21: Configure Optical Modules...................................................................................... 87
Figure 8-22: SFPs on Core Cards ............................................................................................... 88
Figure 8-23: Ethernet Domain ..................................................................................................... 92
Figure 8-24: Ethernet Domain Menu Screen............................................................................... 92
Figure 8-25: Ethernet Domain>Status......................................................................................... 93
Figure 9-1: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window (Logging Out) ......................................... 95
Figure 10-1: Configuration Menu................................................................................................. 98
Figure 10-2: Shelf Menu .............................................................................................................. 99
Figure 10-3: 1:N Protection (SMA1/4UC).................................................................................. 100
Figure 10-4: 1:N Protection Menu (SMA1/4UC)........................................................................ 101
Figure 10-5: Create or Amend 1:N Card Protection .................................................................. 101
Figure 10-6: 1:N Protection (SMA1/4 UC)................................................................................. 102
Figure 10-7: 1:N Protection (SMA1/4 UC)................................................................................. 103
Figure 10-8: SMA1/4UC Core Trib Protection........................................................................... 103

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Figure 10-9: Core Card Protection Screen................................................................................ 104
Figure 10-10: Shelf Details ........................................................................................................ 104
Figure 10-11: NE Name............................................................................................................. 106
Figure 10-12: Global SNC Protection Persistency .................................................................... 106
Figure 10-13: Section SD Configuration.................................................................................... 107
Figure 10-14: Path SD Configuration ........................................................................................ 108
Figure 10-15: Port SD Configuration ......................................................................................... 109
Figure 10-16: Global MS Protection WTR Period ..................................................................... 110
Figure 10-17: Global Path Protection WTR Period ................................................................... 110
Figure 10-18: Global Port Protection WTR Period .................................................................... 111
Figure 10-19: Alarm Output State Configuration ....................................................................... 112
Figure 10-20: Transport Layer Configuration ............................................................................ 113
Figure 10-21: Gateway Interface Configuration ........................................................................ 114
Figure 10-22: Network Layer Configuration .............................................................................. 116
Figure 10-23: NSAP Address Structure .................................................................................... 117
Figure 10-24: IS-IS/ES-IS System Configuration ...................................................................... 118
Figure 10-25: IS-IS Warning...................................................................................................... 119
Figure 10-26: DCC IS-IS Metrics............................................................................................... 120
Figure 10-27: Amend DCCr IS-IS Metrics ................................................................................. 120
Figure 10-28: IS-IS metrics Warning ......................................................................................... 121
Figure 10-29: Reachable Address Prefixes............................................................................... 122
Figure 10-30: Create Reachable Address Prefix - Port Type Q Selected................................. 123
Figure 10-31: Create RAP (Port Type DCCr or DCCm Selected)............................................. 123
Figure 10-32: RAP Screen ........................................................................................................ 124
Figure 10-33: Manual Adjacencies ............................................................................................ 125
Figure 10-34: Create Manual Adjacency - DCCr or DCCm Selected ....................................... 126
Figure 10-35: Amend Manual Adjacency .................................................................................. 127
Figure 10-36: Global Comms Performance Counts .................................................................. 129
Figure 10-37: Comms Performance Counts Per DCC Interface ............................................... 130
Figure 10-38: Comms Message Based Persistency Thresholds .............................................. 131

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Figure 10-39: Comms Time Based Persistency Thresholds..................................................... 132
Figure 10-40: Level 1 Routing Table ......................................................................................... 133
Figure 10-41: Level 2 Routing Tables ....................................................................................... 134
Figure 10-42: CLNS Ping .......................................................................................................... 135
Figure 10-43: Working DCC Configuration................................................................................ 137
Figure 10-44: Amend Working DCC Configuration ................................................................... 137
Figure 10-45: Default DCC Configuration ................................................................................. 139
Figure 10-46: Amend Default DCC Configuration ..................................................................... 139
Figure 10-47: Working LAPD Configuration .............................................................................. 140
Figure 10-48: Amend Working LAPD Configuration ................................................................. 141
Figure 10-49: Default LAPD Configuration................................................................................ 142
Figure 10-50: Amend Default LAPD Configuration ................................................................... 143
Figure 10-51: Sync Mode .......................................................................................................... 144
Figure 10-52: Single SETG Mode ............................................................................................. 146
Figure 10-53: External Trib Sync Origin .................................................................................... 148
Figure 10-54: External Trib Sync Origin .................................................................................... 150
Figure 10-55: Diagnostic Reset: ................................................................................................ 151
Figure 10-56: AIS Injection ........................................................................................................ 152
Figure 10-57: SOH Byte Bypass ............................................................................................... 152
Figure 10-58: Auxiliary Overhead Byte ..................................................................................... 153
Figure 10-59: Interworking Criterion.......................................................................................... 154
Figure 10-60: Date and Time .................................................................................................... 155
Figure 10-61: Change Password............................................................................................... 156
Figure 10-62: LCT User Admin ................................................................................................. 157
Figure 10-63: Add LCT User ..................................................................................................... 157
Figure 10-64: LCT Security Settings ......................................................................................... 160
Figure 11-1: Fault Management Menu ...................................................................................... 161
Figure 11-2: NE Alarm Event Type Configuration ..................................................................... 165
Figure 11-3: User Input Alarms ................................................................................................. 166
Figure 11-4: All Disabled Alarms............................................................................................... 167

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Figure 11-5: Inhibited Alarms .................................................................................................... 168
Figure 11-6: Alarm Persistence Configuration .......................................................................... 169
Figure 11-7: Fault Action Disable .............................................................................................. 171
Figure 11-8: Event Detection Thresholds.................................................................................. 172
Figure 11-9: Diagnostic Alarm Persistency ............................................................................... 173
Figure 11-10: Alarm Bus Driver Enable/ Disable....................................................................... 176
Figure 11-11: Historic Alarm Log............................................................................................... 177
Figure 11-12: Historic Alarm Log Filter...................................................................................... 178
Figure 11-13: Intermittent Historic Alarm Log............................................................................ 179
Figure 11-14: Historic Status Log.............................................................................................. 180
Figure 11-15: Historic Performance Event Log ......................................................................... 181
Figure 11-16: Graphical Card Alarm Display............................................................................. 186
Figure 12-1: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC Window - Status Menu (LCT).......................... 189
Figure 12-2: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC Window - Status Menu (LCTS) ....................... 189
Figure 12-3: Set NE Online/Offline............................................................................................ 190
Figure 12-4: Setting the NE Online Warning Dialogue Screen ................................................. 190
Figure 13-1: Connections Menu ................................................................................................ 193
Figure 13-2: Cross Connection Details ..................................................................................... 193
Figure 13-3: Cross-Connection Details - Menu Structure ......................................................... 194
Figure 13-4: HOVC Config - HOVC #1...................................................................................... 196
Figure 13-5: HOVC Config - HOVC #1 TC Tab......................................................................... 197
Figure 13-6: Traffic Mode Tab (C to V cards)............................................................................ 198
Figure 13-7: Section Trace Configuration - Section Tab........................................................... 199
Figure 13-8: Section Configuration - Synchronisation Tab ....................................................... 200
Figure 13-9: Section Configuration - AU Pointer Strategy Tab ................................................. 201
Figure 13-10: All Performance Reporting States....................................................................... 202
Figure 13-11: Performance Reporting States............................................................................ 203
Figure 13-12: Performance Reports.......................................................................................... 203
Figure 13-13: UAT Records....................................................................................................... 204
Figure 13-14: Exception Thresholds ......................................................................................... 205

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Figure 13-15: Section OH Byte Values ..................................................................................... 206
Figure 13-16: STM-1 Section Error Injection............................................................................. 208
Figure 13-17: STM-1 HOVC# Error Injection ............................................................................ 208
Figure 13-18: STM-n PRBS Injection ........................................................................................ 209
Figure 13-19: PRBS Detection .................................................................................................. 210
Figure 13-20: Set Admin State .................................................................................................. 212
Figure 13-21: Create Cross Connection.................................................................................... 213
Figure 13-22: Cross Connection Details ................................................................................... 214
Figure 13-23: Create Supervisory Unequipped......................................................................... 215
Figure 13-24: Supervisory Unequipped Details......................................................................... 216
Figure 13-25: Confirm Deletion ................................................................................................. 217
Figure 13-26: Set Admin State .................................................................................................. 218
Figure 13-27: Create Cross-Connection ................................................................................... 220
Figure 13-28: Broadcast Cross-Connection Details .................................................................. 221
Figure 13-29: Create SNC Protection ....................................................................................... 223
Figure 13-30: Create SNC Protection - Operation Tab 1 .......................................................... 223
Figure 13-31: Create SNC Protection - Signal Degrade Tab .................................................... 225
Figure 13-32: Create SNC Protection - Configuration Tab ....................................................... 225
Figure 13-33: Create SNC Protection - Tandem Connection Tab ............................................ 226
Figure 13-34: Delete SNC Protection........................................................................................ 227
Figure 13-35: Swap Protection .................................................................................................. 228
Figure 13-36: VC Config............................................................................................................ 229
Figure 13-37: Through Path Configuration................................................................................ 231
Figure 13-38: PDH OH Byte Values .......................................................................................... 233
Figure 13-39: All Performance Reporting States....................................................................... 234
Figure 13-40: Performance Reporting States............................................................................ 234
Figure 13-41: Performance Reports.......................................................................................... 235
Figure 13-42: UAT Performance Records................................................................................. 237
Figure 13-43: Exception Thresholds ......................................................................................... 238
Figure 13-44: Display Through Path ......................................................................................... 239

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Figure 13-45: Display Through Path ......................................................................................... 239
Figure 13-46: Select Through Path ........................................................................................... 240
Figure 13-47: Select Through Path ........................................................................................... 241
Figure 13-48: Selecting a Port From the CC Details Screen .................................................... 242
Figure 13-49: CC Details Screen For a Port ............................................................................. 242
Figure 13-50: Port Configuration Screen................................................................................... 243
Figure 13-51: Port Configuration Menu Structure ..................................................................... 243
Figure 13-52: Port Configuration ............................................................................................... 245
Figure 13-53: Selecting Connected Port Configuration............................................................. 247
Figure 13-54: Connected Port Configuration............................................................................. 248
Figure 13-55: Select 2M Output Timing Buffer Config .............................................................. 250
Figure 13-56: 2M Output Timing Buffer Configuration .............................................................. 250
Figure 13-57: Selecting Wander Buffer Sync Source ............................................................... 252
Figure 13-58: Wander Buffer Synchronisation Source.............................................................. 252
Figure 13-59: Selecting CRC-4 Monitoring ............................................................................... 253
Figure 13-60: CRC-4 Monitoring ............................................................................................... 254
Figure 13-61: Port Configuration ............................................................................................... 255
Figure 13-62: CRC-4 Insertion .................................................................................................. 255
Figure 13-63: Selecting Create Port Protection......................................................................... 256
Figure 13-64: Create Port Protection ........................................................................................ 257
Figure 13-65: Selecting Delete Port Protection ......................................................................... 259
Figure 14-1: Performance Menu................................................................................................ 261
Figure 14-2: Set 24-hour End Time........................................................................................... 261
Figure 14-3: Confirm Clearance ................................................................................................ 262
Figure 14-4: Performance Thresholds....................................................................................... 263
Figure 16-1: 2Mb/s 120W Balanced Tributary Test At RJ45 Patch Panel................................. 278
Figure 17-1: Example Subnetwork ............................................................................................ 294
Figure 17-2: Contra-directional.................................................................................................. 295
Figure 17-3: Co-directional ........................................................................................................ 295
Figure 17-4: Contra-Directional ................................................................................................. 296
Figure 17-5: Co-directional ........................................................................................................ 296

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Blank Page

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Release 3.1 List of Tables
List of Tables
Table 2-1: Slot Status Icons ........................................................................................................ 27
Table 2-2: Button Effects ............................................................................................................. 30
Table 8-1: Available Facilities Selectable from Individual Cards/units ........................................ 64
Table 8-2: Tributary Card MSP Pairing Rules ............................................................................. 67
Table 8-3: Protection Groups for MSP Protection ....................................................................... 67
Table 8-4: Signal Label Configuration VC Type .......................................................................... 90
Table 10-1: SASE Mode Options .............................................................................................. 145
Table 11-1: Raising Alarm Events ............................................................................................. 161
Table 11-2: Clearing Alarm Events ........................................................................................... 162
Table 11-3: Status Event Criteria .............................................................................................. 163
Table 11-4: Event Detection Threshold Ranges ....................................................................... 172
Table 13-1: HOVC #1 Tab Entries ............................................................................................ 196
Table 13-2: HOVC #1 Tab Entries ............................................................................................ 197
Table: 13-3: Traffic Mode Tab Entries....................................................................................... 198
Table 16-1: Units Wavelength. ID and Launch Power .............................................................. 273
Table 17-1: Allocation of DCC Channels................................................................................... 286
Table 17-2: Unit /Wavelength and Power Levels ...................................................................... 289
Table 17-3: Unit/Management Type Power Levels ................................................................... 290
Table 19-1: Factory EOW Settings............................................................................................ 304
Table 19-2: Fundamental Problems .......................................................................................... 314
Table 19-3: Operational Problems ............................................................................................ 314

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Release 3.1 List of Tables
Blank Page

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Release 3.1 LCT Presentation and Operation
Chapter 1:
Introduction
1.1 Equipment Covered
This manual covers the operation of the Local Craft Terminal (LCT) software for the
following equipment:
· SMA1/4UC –SMA1/4 Ultra Compact
1.2 Software Functionality

The LCT software allows you to commission an SMA1/4UC and then perform
management, control, and monitoring operations for it. You can do this either:
· At the LCT or
· Through the Local Craft Terminal Subsystem (LCTS) that runs under the
ServiceOn Optical Element Manager network management system.
Following commissioning, the LCT presents a menu-driven control system. From this,
subject to security provisions, you can access the interactive display screens that
enable you to perform the LCT’s management, control, and monitoring functions.
1.2.1 Local Craft Terminal (LCT)/Local Craft Terminal Subsystem (LCTS)

The LCT software runs under Windows on a personal computer connected directly to
an NE. When you want to use the LCT software, you need to log in and log out once
you have finished.
Another version of this software - the LCT Subsystem (LCTS) runs underneath the
ServiceOn Optical Element Manager network management system. ServiceOn Optical
Element Manager uses the LCTS to manage SMA1/4UC NEs. The LCTS is started
and closed automatically by ServiceOn Optical Element Manager so you do not need
to log into or out of the system in this case. The LCTS user has the access rights
equivalent to an Administrator user in the LCT.
In general, the same (or very similar) menus and screens will appear in LCTS as in
the LCT, with the following important exceptions:
· You do not have to log on through the LCTS.
· Software cannot be downloaded using the LCTS.
· An NE cannot be upgraded using LCTS.
Where functions are not relevant to the LCTS, or are not available through it, these
functions are clearly marked throughout the procedures in this manual.
Thus, in this book, where reference is made to the LCT, that information applies to
both the LCT and the LCTS unless specifically stated otherwise.
Note: The LCTS LEDs are not updated in real-time. These are only updated when
the shelf is redrawn. This means that when the shelf is first opened the LEDs
accurately reflect the NE state and when the shelf is redrawn. The only way to
see real-time alarms in ServiceOn Optical Element Manager is to use RTAM.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
1.3 How This Book Is Organised

Chapter 2: LCT Presentation and Operation describes the presentation of the LCT
screens and the general operation of the LCT. It shows examples of the menus and
the functions available from them that you can access in the software.
Chapter 3: LCT Software Installation describes how to install the LCT software on the
computer. This chapter does not apply to the LCTS.
Chapter 4: LCT Log in describes how to run the LCT software and log in. It also
includes details how the password security level controls access to the various
functions available throughout the software.
Chapter 5: Before Commissioning describes what you need to do before you start
commissioning the SMA1/4UC.
Chapter 6: Commissioning describes the software commissioning procedures.
Chapter 7: After-Commissioning Procedures describes the tasks you need to perform

once you have finished the software commissioning but before you start using the LCT
software to manage and monitor the SMA.1/4UC.
Chapter 8: Card Pop-Up Menus describes the various pop-up menus available from
the cards you can insert into the SMA1/4UC, and further describes the functions
available from the menus and the operation of the functions.
Chapters 9 to Chapter 14: give a run through the totality of main LCT menus and
functions as follows:
· Chapter 9: File Menu
· Chapter 10: Configuration Menu
· Chapter 11: Fault Management Menu
· Chapter 12: Status Menu
· Chapter 13: Connections Menu
· Chapter 14: Performance Menu
Chapters 15 to 18 provide a targeted walk through of the use of the LCT in the initial
configuration and interconnection of a SMA1/4UC within a subnetwork. There is a
certain amount of duplication of material with Chapters 5, 6 and 7
Chapter 15: Initial configuration.
Chapter 16: Functional Checks following Commissioning
Chapter 17: Subnetwork NE Integration
Chapter 18: Subnetwork Tests
Chapter 19 Describes the configuration of the EOW stand-alone unit designed to

interface to the Marconi SMA1/4UC to provide EOW functionality across the SDH
network. This is can be done via the Windows Terminal application running on the
same PC that is running the LCT application software.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Chapter 2:
LCT Presentation And Operation
This chapter describes the layout of the LCT screens and the menus available through
them. It also describes general keyboard and data entry operation and finally
describes the Print function that is available throughout the software.
Note: The screens used throughout this manual are for illustration only. The actual
contents of the screens may vary depending on the equipment you are using
and its configuration.
If you are using the LCT, continue from Local Craft Terminal.
If you are using the LCTS, continue from Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC.
2.1 Local Craft Terminal Opening Window

Once you have installed the software as described in Chapter 3: and you run it, the
Local Craft Terminal opening window first appears as in Figure 2-1.
Figure 2-1: LCT Opening Window

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Once at this opening window, you can select the following menus:
· File menu: This allows you to:
- Log into the NE using the LCT software. Refer to Chapter 4:. Once you
have logged in, you gain access to the Local Craft Terminal:
SMA1/4UC window which allows you to begin managing and monitoring
the equipment. However, before you can log in, you must complete the
commissioning of the equipment. See the Commission menu below.
- Perform remote management of other NEs. Refer to Chapter 7: After-

Commissioning Procedures.
- Exit from the LCT software.
· Commission menu: This allows you to commission the Comms/Controller

Card - you must perform the commissioning before you can access the LCT
management and monitoring functions. Refer to Chapter 6: Commissioning.
· Configuration menu: This allows you to backup data from the equipment to
external storage media, or to restore previously backed up data to the
equipment. Refer to Chapter 7: After-Commissioning Procedures.
2.2 Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC Window

The Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window displays when you:
· Successfully log onto the LCT software - in this case the screen title includes
the text Local Craft Terminal, as in Figure 2-2: Local Craft Terminal:
SMA1/4UC.
· Open a NE from the LCTS running under the ServiceOn Optical Element
Manager - in this case the screen title shows the SMA1/4UC.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Figure 2-2: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC Window - Accessed via LCT
2.2.1 Slot Status Icon

The slot status icon can be one of the following:
Table 2-1: Slot Status Icons
Icon Meaning
^ Card not in slot
! Card failed
? Error in slot, such as wrong card fitted
Alarm LED is active for this slot
LCTS only - LEDs on the LCTS display are indicative only. To verify the alarm
situation with LED alarm indications, use the real time monitor (RTM) in MV36.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
2.3 Menu Selection And Data Entry

The following paragraphs describe how to select menu options, call up pop-up menus,
or enter data into data entry fields in the screens available from the various menu
options.
Procedures are described in the order in which they appear on the various menus,
working across the Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window menu, from File to
Help.
Figure 2-3: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC Window Menu
Each procedure is preceded by a Path, which shows the sequence of menu selections
you need to make to access that procedure. For example the following path for Set
Filter is illustrated in Figure 2-4.
Path: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC screen > Fault Management > NE Event
Logs > Historic Alarm > Set Filter
Figure 2-4: Set Filter
2.3.1 Using the Keyboard

Note: In cross connections windows, it is best to use the mouse when selecting the
source/destination card. If you need to use the cursor keys instead of the
mouse, then you must allow the windows to refresh after each keystroke
before making the next keystroke.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
· Menus, menu options and some data fields have a letter underlined in their
title. To select the item, press the underlined letter whilst holding down the
<Alt> key, for example, <Alt>+<F>, <Alt>+<H>, etc.
· To navigate between option fields on a screen use the <Tab> key.
· Cursor (Arrow) Keys: Use the arrow keys (up, down, left, right) to position
the cursor over the option. Select <Enter> or <Return>.
To navigate between options within the same field, use the Cursor keys.
· When you have navigated into a field that allows entry of a value, use the
keyboard keys (letters and/or numbers as appropriate to the field).
· Use the <backspace> key to delete an existing entry in a field that you want
to amend.
· Icon Menu Selection: with the keyboard, use the <Tab> key to move the
highlight to the required icon (for example a slot), then either press <shift>
and <F10> together, or press the menu key:
which is located to the lower, right-hand of the keyboard, usually near the
right-hand <Ctrl> key.
· Drop down lists: A down arrow on the end of a data entry field indicates
these. To select from a drop down list, press <Tab> to highlight the field,
then press the up and down cursor arrow keys to move through the list.
Select <Enter> to select the currently highlighted value.
2.3.2 Using the Mouse

The following are the default settings, though individual operators may redefine the
mouse keys as required.
· Left Click: To select a menu, option or field, position the cursor over the item.
Click the left-hand mouse button.
· Right Click: To call up pop-up menus, click the right-hand mouse button.
· Drop down lists: (See above under keyboard entry for a description of
these.) Click the arrow at the end of the field and move the mouse cursor
through the resulting list. Click on the value you require to put it into the data
entry field.
2.3.3 Pushbuttons
Throughout the LCT screens, the pushbuttons shown in the table are used. When
present, they normally appear at the bottom of each window. The presence or
absence of each button depends on the screen currently on display, but at least one of
these buttons will be available.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Table 2-2: Button Effects
Button Effect
Applies changes made to settings without removing the window in

Apply
which the changes were made.
Removes the window without applying any changes that were not
Cancel
previously applied.
Accepts any changes that have been made in the window, and
OK removes the window. Also used to indicate that you acknowledge
information in the window before removing the window.
Returns a window to the condition it was in when it was last opened,

Reset or to the condition it was in before the most recent changes were
applied.
Help Displays a window containing contextual help information.
2.3.4 Error Messages

Throughout this manual, the procedures detail the steps needed to perform the
functions available from the menus. When you select Apply or OK the system
validates your entries. If your entries are invalid for any reason, an error message will
inform you that the action has not been performed and will give a reason why.
If an error message displays, note the error, select OK, to exit the error screen and
take the appropriate corrective action.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
2.4 SMA1/4UC Management, Control And Monitoring

2.4.1 Menu Hierarchy
Once you have completed commissioning, you can log into the LCT software to
access the Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window with seven menus: File,
Configuration, Fault Management, Status, Connections, Performance and Help.
All choices relate to some aspect of the control and monitoring of a SMA1/4UC and
provide entry points to further sub-menus. Under the File menu Logout functionally
disengages the LCT from control and monitoring the SMA, and allows physical
disconnection of the terminal without affecting SMA1/4UC functions in any way. The
menu hierarchy is illustrated in Figure 2-5: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC to
Figure 2-9: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC.
2.4.1.1 Menu Option Structure for SMA1/4 Ultra Compact LCT

Note: The following screens are for illustration only. Under some configurations,
certain other menu options may appear or some may not be available.
2.4.1.2 Configuration Menu

Figure 2-5: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC Window - Configuration Menu
2.4.1.3 Fault Management Menu
Figure 2-6: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC Window - Fault Management Menu

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
2.4.1.4 Status Menu
Figure 2-7: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC Window - Status Menu (LCT)
2.4.1.5 Connections Menu
Figure 2-8: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC Window - Connections Menu
2.4.1.6 Performance Menu
Figure 2-9: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC Window - Performance Menu
Most menu options bring up a menu offering further options for selection.
Notable exceptions are:
· Configuration > Shelf > Configuration which shows a graphic of the shelf
layout. This allows for operations that include configure/unconfigure/modify
cards, etc.
· Connections > Connections which invokes the Cross-Connection Details

screen that has a menu structure of its own.
Where an option does not lead to a further menu of options, it will usually bring up an
information/action screen that enables you to perform the desired observation/action.
The information/action screens allow you to exit back to the Local Craft Terminal:
SMA1/4UC window, usually by way of a Cancel button.
2.4.2 Error Messages

A number of operations performed within the menu structure require the sending of a
request for implementation to the Comms/Controller of the SMA1/4UC. Apply is a
screen action. When you apply a change, the Comms/Controller complies with the
request or issues an error message to indicate the reason why the change request
failed.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
2.4.3 Warning Messages

Warning messages are presented on some screen displays of the type illustrated in.
Figure 2-10.
Figure 2-10: Warning Action Screen
2.5 Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC Window Pop Up Menus

By selecting the various slots from the SMA1/4UC icon on the Local Craft Terminal:
SMA1/4UC window, you can call up a pop-up menu specific to that slot. The functions
available from the pop-up menus depend on the type of card configured in the slot.
Chapter 8: Card Pop-Up Menus describes the functions available from the various
pop-up menus.
2.6 Main Menu Procedure Arrangements

An operating procedure for each option available from the Local Craft Terminal:
SMA1/4UC window main menu is provided. Procedures are grouped according to the
menu that they appear on, for example all procedures for options accessed from the
Configuration menu are grouped together. Within a menu, procedures are arranged in
order of the options on the menu.
No attempt to establish an overall performance sequence is made; you can select

procedures as required. To this end, each procedure is complete in itself and starts
with the selection of the appropriate menu.
2.7 Time-outs And Lock-ups

Note: An Inactivity Timeout occurs after 15-minutes if there is no interaction between
the LCT and NE.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
2.8 Print Function

This section describes the print function found throughout the software.
1 Where a screen or menu displays a Print option, select Print to display the
following screen.
Figure 2-11: Print Options
2.8.1.1 Printer Pane

Name - Lists the printers set up on your computer. You can select an
alternative from the list available.
Properties - Select this to set up the options for the selected printer. The
options available depend on the printer’s features.
Print to File - This prints the document to a file instead of routing it directly to a
printer. If you select this you are asked for a file name and a location. Files are
text files with the extension ‘.txt’, viewable using a text editor.
2.8.1.2 Print Range Pane

This specifies whether to print the whole document, a specific page range or
the current selection.
2.8.1.3 Copies Pane

This allows you to select the number of copies. If you select more than one
copy, depending on the printer’s capabilities you can choose whether to:
· collate the copies (print all pages for copy one, then all pages for
copy two and so on) or
· not collate (this prints all page ones, then all page twos and so on).
2 Select OK to print.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Release 3.1 LCT Software Installation
Chapter 3:
LCT Software Installation
3.1 Introduction
This chapter describes how to install the LCT software onto the PC.
Note: This chapter applies to the LCT only. The installation of the LCTS is covered in
the separate ServiceOn Optical Element Manager network management
system documentation.
The LCT comprises application software running on an IBM compatible PC. The PC
itself is not an integral part of the SMA1/4UC installation but is connected to the
SMA1/4UC as required. Marconi produces and supplies the application software. The
PC can be, but is not necessarily, supplied by Marconi.
The LCT is not dedicated to any particular SMA1/4UC. With the correct software
loaded to hard disk, you can use it to connect and commission most of Marconi's NEs.
3.1.1 Type of PC Required

The minimum specification required to run the LCT software for the SMA1/4UC is:
· IBM PC Compatible
· Windows 2000, and Windows XP
· Intel Pentium or Celeron running at 300 MHz as a minimum, a

processerclock speed in excess of 1GHz is recommended.
· Windows 2000 64M Bytes RAM (minimum) Recommended 128M Bytes
· Windows XP 128M Bytes RAM (minimum)
· 800 x 600 colour SVGA display
· 2G Byte Hard Disk (minimum)
· CD-ROM drive fixed. Sixteen speed or better (May be swappable with floppy
drive).
· Pointing device (for example trackerball, mouse, etc.)
· Floppy Drive Single 3.5 inch 1.44 Mbyte (May be swappable with CD_ROM
drive
· I/O Ports Windows 2000
· One serial port (for communivations with Mux)
· One PS/2 port

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
· One parallel port (for local printing)
· Ethernet RJ-45 port.
· Windows XP
· One serial port (for communivations with Mux)
· One parallel port or USB (for local printing)
· One parallel port (for local printing)
· Ethernet RJ-45 port
· Software : MS Windows 2000 Professional SP4 Edition or MS Windows XP

Professional SP1 Edition
· Rechargeable battery pack with AC mains adapter/charger
The above PC requirement can be met with the Marconi Notebook D600 as supplied
by the Dell Computer Corporation as a Standard Product.
3.1.2 Installation of The PC

Instructions for the installation and setting up of the PC are supplied with the item and
you should follow these up to the point of loading the application software.
Connection to the SMA1/4UC is via a cable from the RS232 interface of the PC to the
‘Local Terminal’ connector on the SMA1/4UC Ancillary Unit. A 5m made-up cable is
available for this purpose - Marconi codes 1HAU61913AAF.
3.1.3 Software Installation

The LCT software is supplied on CD-ROM. Software is product-release-specific and
may be customer-specific. To ensure that the correct CDs are supplied, a unique
coding system is employed.
Note: If the new installation is to replace a previous issue of 32-bit LCT software
(after release 1.21.3), then the previous installation will be over-written.
However, if you have a 16-bit LCT (that needs replacing), then it will not be
over-written, you will have to delete it.
The procedure to install the LCT software should in most cases only need to be done
once at the initial commissioning stage, and is explained below.
3.1.4 LCT Software Installation Procedure
3.1.4.1 Installation from CD-ROM

1 Make sure that the LCT PC has a compatible version of Windows installed
(see Type of PC Required on page 35).
2 Insert the LCT Installation CD in the appropriate CD drive.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
3 Select the Start button and then Run. The window in Error! Reference
source not found. allows you to browse to the correct location of the
executable file (Setup.exe). Click on OK to begin the installation process.
The LCT set up begins and the Local Craft Terminal Setup window displays.
When you have read the information displayed on this screen, select Next to
continue or Cancel to exit the setup.
If you continue, the program installs the LCT software to the computer hard
disk.
The LCT software installation progress displays in the form of a bar graph
indicating the percentage of installation completed.
On completion, the screen states that the setup has finished copying files to
your computer. You are then instructed to restart the computer before you can
use the LCT software.
4 Select FINISH, and the computer will automatically restart. The LCT shortcut
icon (see is now available on the Windows desktop.
Figure 3-1: LCT Windows Desktop Shortcut Icon (32Bit)
Note: If this new installation is to replace a previous issue of 32-bit LCT software
(after release 1.21.3), then the previous installation will be over-written.
However, if you have a 16-bit LCT (that needs replacing), then you will have to
manually delete this previous version.
Chapter 4 LCT Log in describes how to run the software and log into the system.
3.2 Installing New Comms And Controller Software

In the SMA1/4UC we have a Core A card which combines Core Card, Comms and
Controller functions.
3.2.1 Upgrade Procedure
If you need to upgrade the Comms/Controller SMC software, then you must first
inspect the LCT version (see Software Code Inspection below for details).
3.2.1.1 Software Code Inspection

Path: Local Craft Terminal opening window > Help > About the Local Craft
Terminal (LCT)
1 Select About The Local Craft Terminal (LCT) from the path shown.
2 If you are satisfied that new software is required, you can install the new
Comms/Controller software by downloading new software to the SMC banks.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
3.2.2 Software Download (LCT only)

You can download new software to the Comms/Controller unit (which resides on the
Core A Card) and equipment cards of a commissioned SMA1/4UC. This allows the
existing software to be replaced by a new release of compatible software, to provide
enhanced equipment facilities for example.
Note: The Comms Controller and the traffic cards are partitioned cards in the sense
that they card software banks that can contain alternate versions of the
application software.
Software download allows you to load new software without disturbing traffic carried
by the SMA. You can access software download:
· Directly from the Comms/Controller on the Core A card (SMC > Bank
Status) and download to the equipment cards. or
· From the Start button. This procedure is described below.
Note: If the new software is incompatible, but allowable for a specific card, or you
change the Comms/Controller software, then you must repeat the
commissioning procedure.
3.2.2.1 NE Software Install

You download the new software from CD-ROM.
Path: Start > Programs > Marconi Communications LCT > NE Software Install
1 Select NE Software Install from the path shown. See Figure 3-2.
Figure 3-2: NE Software Install
2 The Select Source File screen prompts you to locate the software for
download.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
· If you wish to continue with Software Installation, place the disk

provided into the correct drive, navigate to its location, select the file
and select Open.
· Otherwise, select Cancel to exit this screen.
The Installation screen shows the relevant file and header details.
If the details are as required and the information is correct, select Install to
access the Select Destination Directory screen.
Note: In the Select Destination Directory screen you can select a directory,
but cannot change the file name.
3 Select OK to send new software to the selected directory. The LCT responds
with an Installation Progress screen see Figure 3-6 Installation Progress.
During the installation process, the data of the current disk is downloaded and
an Information screen appears, asking you to insert the next disk into the
drive if required.
4 Select OK in the Information screen to continue.
A screen shows the software installation progress.
If you want to abort the download, select Abort at any time before the
download has completed.
Note: If an error message displays, the download has failed. Take the
appropriate corrective action.
5 Click OK in the Successful Download screen to end the download.
6 Once the software has downloaded to the hard disk, then you can perform a
software download to the cards.
Note: New software can be downloaded to an SMC card (situated on the

Comms/Controller Card) at any given time for the whole or parts of
the multiplexer, so long as the multiplexer is not in a decommissioned
state. This allows existing software to be replaced by a new release
of compatible software.
3.2.3 View Software Download Header

Use this function to call up the View Software Download Header screen, which
contains file and directory details. You cannot amend the details through this screen.
Path: Start > Programs > Local Craft Terminal > View NE Software Header
1 Select View NE Software Header from the path shown to display the Install
Software Download Header screen showing the file and directory details.
2 When you have finished viewing, select Cancel to return to the Local Craft
Terminal opening window.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Blank Page

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Release 3.1 LCT Log In
Chapter 4:
LCT Log in
Note: This chapter does not apply to the LCTS running under the ServiceOn Optical
Element Manager network management system.
4.1 Run LCT Software

Once you have connected the PC to the NE and have booted the PC:
Select the Windows Start button, then select Programs and Marconi Communications
LCT to access the LCT icon.
Select the Local Craft Terminal 32 icon to run the LCT software. A box on the screen
indicates that the LCT is being loaded, together with a Stop button, which you can use
to halt and exit the loading process.
Alternatively, you can simply click the LCT Windows Desktop Shortcut Icon on the
Windows Desktop:
4.2 Local Craft Terminal Screen Presentation

When you run the LCT software, the Local Craft Terminal opening window first
appears as in Figure 4-1.
Figure 4-1: LCT Opening Window

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
4.3 Log In
4.3.1.1 Introduction
You must log into the LCT to gain access to the menu functions. LCT Security gives
more information on this.
4.3.2 LCT Security

Entry to any of the menu functions on the Local Craft Terminal opening window is
through a user name and password which together also determine your operator level.
4.3.2.1 LCT Operator Levels

LCTs can be used at three levels of operation. Your user name and password
determine the level to which you can work. The levels are:
· Administrator (high level) - all access
· System Operator (intermediate level) - limited read/write access
· Casual Operator (low level) - mainly read-only access
Read and write access is only available once any Element Manager (EM) facility is
either not functional or has specifically relinquished control. Casual user access is
available at all times.
Authorised Administrator users may change their own and other users’ passwords in
the Configuration > LCT User Admin option from the Local Craft Terminal:
SMA1/4UC window.
Note: Allocation of a password must only be made to suitably qualified personnel

for the level concerned.
Administrator
An administrator has full access to all LCT functions, and is the only level of LCT
operator who can do the following:
· Add, delete or change lower level LCT user passwords - up to nine other
users can be created and the level of user specified (an LCT administrator
cannot change EM passwords at any level, but an EM system operator or
administrator can change an LCT administrator’s password). The passwords
are stored in the element memory.
· Request a list of LCT users.
· Decommission the element.
System Operator
A System Operator has access to all LCT functions, apart from the administrator-
specific functions described above.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Casual Operator
Casual operators are restricted to read-only operation and a small sub-set of write
operations. These write operations are of local significance, associated with alarm
monitoring.
4.3.3 Log In Procedure

You need to log in to access most of the options available from the Local Craft
Terminal opening window. The following description uses the File > Log in option but
applies equally to the other options apart from Help and Remote NE Management.
Path: Local Craft Terminal opening window > File > Log in
1 Select Log in from the path shown through the Local Craft Terminal opening
window. This displays the Log in bulletin board, containing the User Name
and Password fields. Click the left mouse button in the User Name field, and
type your user name, then press <Tab> to access the Password field.
2 In the Password field, type your current password (the default for the Admin
user is SDHMUXES), this must contain a minimum of eight and a maximum of
fifteen ASCII printable characters (a space is not a valid character).
Note: For security reasons, the password is not shown in the field as you
enter it, but as a series of stars (********).
Figure 4-2: Login
3 Press <Return> or select OK, this sends the details to the Controller/Comms
Card for validation. The Controller/Comms Card responds either by allowing
access to the Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window, or issuing an error
message.
· If an error message displays, the password has been rejected. Select

Cancel or OK to return to the Log in bulletin board and repeat the
log in procedure.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Blank Page

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Release 3.1 Before Commissioning
Chapter 5:
Before Commissioning
5.1 Introduction
This chapter describes the initial conditions that must apply before you can start
commissioning. Once the equipment has been commissioned, you can start using the
LCT to manage the equipment
The initial conditions that must apply before starting commissioning proper are:
· The SMA1/4UC must be fitted with:
- A Core A card (combines Core Card and Comms/Controller functions)
- PWR/LCT LTU
- The subrack
- Any other cards required by the particular application for which it is to be

configured.
· Local Terminal software must be installed on the PC hard drive
· The LCT must be connected to the equipment.
The commissioning procedure proper is a software-controlled process in which data is

loaded from the LCT to the Comms/Controller Card on the equipment.
You must enter the data:
· For Communications System Addresses
· For Shelf Configuration
· To Set the Comms/Controller On-line.
The commissioning procedure must occur in a set sequence, automatic sequencing of

the screen presentation ensures this.
5.2 Pre-requisites
5.2.1 SMA1/4UC
Complete the installation process for the SMA1/4UC - fit all cards required for the
particular application fit any unequipped card positions with blanking plates.
Note: There are no end of shelf power supplies on the SMA1/4UC. The Core A,
Comms/Aux/Ancillary and 2M tributaries have on board power supplies.
Generic tributary cards require an LTU that provides the power for them. The
48V power is fed to the PWR/LCT LTU which filters it and passes it to the
other cards.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Release 3.1 Before Commissioning
5.2.2 LCT Connection

Connect the LCT to the SMA1/4UC via a RJ45 on the PWR/LCT LTU.
5.2.3 LCT Software

The LCT software must be installed as described in Chapter 3: and started as
described in Run LCT Software.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Release 3.1 Commissioning
Chapter 6:
Commissioning
6.1 Introduction
Note: Commissioning is available from the Status menu in the LCTS running under
ServiceOn Optical Element Manager.
Commissioning starts with running the LCT software and either:
· For the LCT - selecting the Commissioning menu from the Local Craft
· For the LCTS - selecting Commission from the Status menu on the Local
Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window.
There are two commissioning paths:
· Controller commissioning - when using the LCT, you must commission the
Controller part of the Core A card before you can login to the Local Craft
Terminal: SMA1/4UC window, which contains the management and
monitoring functions for the NE.
· Comms Commissioning - this is optional, you only need to commission the

comms part of the Cora A card if you want to connect a remote network
management system to the NE. Figure 6-1 shows the commissioning
sequence.
Figure 6-1: Commissioning Sequence
LCT Opening Window

Controller
Commissioned
Commission menu
Login with Operator Shelf Configuration

Mux Controller Password
(optional) Login with Operator

Comms Transport Layer Config
Password
Gateway Interface Config
Network Layer Config
Comms Commissioned
Before starting commissioning, make sure that you have the necessary resources and
data to hand.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
The commissioning requirements are:
· Operator user name and password for the product being commissioned
· For the Controller commissioning path - the required shelf configuration
· For the Comms commissioning path - the comms data: transport layer,
gateway interfaces and Network Service Address Point (NSAP) address.
Note: In most cases the multiplexer will be either a new installation, or will have been
decommissioned and have had a new/different Core A card fitted (thus
requiring re-configuration).
Note: You can use the Restore IS-IS Static Data function from the Configure menu
to download routing tables.
6.2 Start Commissioning

1 Run the software and log in as described in Chapter 4:, LCT Log in. Be aware
of the requirements before commissioning as described in Chapter 5:, Before
Commissioning.
· If you wish to commission the Controller, continue with Controller

Commissioning below.
· If you wish to commission the Comms, continue with Comms

Commissioning.
6.2.1 Controller Commissioning

Path: Local Craft Terminal opening screen > Commission > Mux Controller
1 Select Mux Controller from the path shown.
· The Set Commissioning Parameters screen illustrated in Figure 6-2

appears
Figure 6-2: Set Commissioning Parameters
2 Amend the Set Commissioning Parameters screen as required. Click Apply

and then Continue.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
TCM Type: allows you to choose the type of Tandem Connection Monitoring
for enhanced fault detection and monitoring of performance across different
network operator’s boundaries.
Tributary Input Alarm Enable: can be Card or Cross-connection.
Shelf Configuration
Note: This screen can also be accessed through the Configuration > Shelf >
Configuration function from the Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window.
That function allows you to amend the shelf configuration after commissioning
is complete.
You can configure the SMA1/4UC shelf with a range of cards/units.
The window shows the physical layout of the SMA1/4UC.
Figure 6-3: SMA1/4UC
3 Select a specific slot to access a pop-up menu. Depending on the current

configuration, this has one or more of the options Adopt, Configure,
Unconfigure or Modify.
· Select Adopt or Configure for unconfigured slots only. Adopt

automatically adopts any card that is currently physically inserted in
the slot. Configure provides a list of cards suitable for that slot.
· Select Modify to change the card type or select Unconfigure as

required.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Note: To change an STM-1 tributary to a different card type, for example to

a 2Mbit/s card, then you must first select Unconfigure and apply this
before configuring or adopting the new card.
4 Repeat this process of selecting a card until the desired shelf configuration is
complete (or see Adopt New Units (Global Adopt) below).
5 Select Apply to send the data to the Comms/Controller Card.
Note: If you attempt to unconfigure a slot that contains a core card, switch
card (if only one is fitted), or a card that is carrying traffic, then the
Comms/Controller prevents this and returns an Invalid Response
message.
6 Select Cancel in the Shelf Configuration screen, to return to the Local Craft
Terminal: SMA1/4UC window.
Note: When cards are being configured/unconfigured, ’Line East/Line West

DCCr LAPD Fail’ alarms may be raised briefly.
Note: If a minimal card configuration is used, then transient ’Synch Source

Fail’ alarms may be raised when setting-up or amending the NE’s
synchronisation parameters from an EM.
Note: When a Switch Card is being configured/unconfigured, transient

Switch Card Fail alarms may be raised briefly.
This completes the Controller Commissioning. You can either:
· Continue with Comms Commissioning
· Continue from Chapter 7: After-Commissioning Procedures.
Adopt New Units (Global Adopt)

You can configure slots individually or accept the minimum configuration for now and,
after the SMA1/4UC has been set on-line, use the Adopt New Units command that is
available from the Configuration menu of the Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC
screen. This performs a ‘global adopt’ of all remaining unconfigured slots that have a
card physically installed in them. If it is not possible to adopt a slot for whatever reason
then a ’cannot adopt’ warning is returned.
6.2.2 Comms Commissioning

Path: Local Craft Terminal opening screen > Commission > Comms
1 Select Comms from the path shown. The Transport Layer Configuration
screen appears as in Figure 6-4.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
6.2.3 Transport Layer Configuration
Figure 6-4: Transport Layer Configuration Screen
The Transport Layer Configuration screen allows you to amend the:
· Initial Re-Transmission Time in the range 8 to 64 seconds (Default 8)
· Re-transmission Count in the range 2 to 15 (Default 4) , and
· Window Timeout in the range 1 to 64 seconds (Default 16).
The Network Planner supplies the three transport layer components. Under
normal conditions, the Comms/Controller supplies the screen with default
values.
2 If the three transport layer components are supplied by the Network Planner
continue with Step 3, if they are not proceed to Step 4 to use the default
settings.
3 Set the three transport layer component fields to the values supplied by the
Network Planner.
· If an error message displays, the transport layer configuration has not

been accepted. Make sure you have entered the details correctly.
Confirm them with the Network Planner and re-enter the values.
5 Select Continue to exit the Transport Layer screen and display the Gateway
Interface Configuration screen.
Gateway Interface Configuration

The Gateway Interface Configuration screen (Figure 6-5) allows for setting the
Gateway Interface type (the default value of None depicting a non-gateway type).
If you need to change the default settings, the Network Planner supplies the new
values. Under normal conditions the Comms/Controller supplies default values as
shown in Figure 6-5.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Figure 6-5: Gateway Interface Configuration
Note: NSAP (Ethernet address) is only applicable to a Gateway NE,

otherwise select None in the Gateway I/F field. Figure 6-5 illustrates a
Gateway type.
6 If the Network Planner has supplied the Information for the fields, proceed with
Step 7, if not go to Step 8 to accept the defaults.
7 Enter the field values supplied by the Network Planner.
8 Select Apply to send data to the Comms/Controller Card.
· If an error message displays, the gateway interface configuration has

not been accepted. Make sure you have entered the details correctly.
Confirm with the Network Planner and re-enter the values.
9 Select Continue to exit the Gateway Interface Configuration screen to

access the Network Layer screen to set the Network Communications
Address.
Network Layer Configuration

The Network Layer Configuration screen (Figure 6-6) allows entry of the information
supplied by the Network Planner.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Figure 6-6: Set Network Address
1 Set the NSAP Selector, Routing Mode Level 1 or 2, (Default 2) Manual Area
Address and System ID fields (in Hexadecimal characters only) to the settings
supplied by the Network Planners.
Note: The system ID must contain twice as many characters as specified in

the System ID Length field. Thus, if the System ID Length is (say) 2,
the System ID must consist of four characters. Changing the System
ID Length causes a warning message to the effect that this will
invalidate the NSAP and adjacent node settings, and delete all
manual adjacencies.
Note: Set the Packet NPDU Lifetime Control field to between 1 to 127
(Default 30) as required for this network (the Network Planners
supply this value).
2 Select Apply to send data to the Comms/Controller Card
· If an error message displays, the network address configuration has

not been accepted. Make sure you have entered the details correctly.
Confirm with the Network Planner and re-enter the values.
3 Select Continue to exit the screen. Provided no error messages have

displayed, the Comms are now operative and the LCT returns to the Local
Craft Terminal opening window.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Blank Page

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Release 3.1 After-Commissioning Procedures
Chapter 7:
After-Commissioning Procedures
7.1 Introduction
On successfully completing commissioning, inspect the status statements on the
Local Craft Terminal opening window, as shown in Figure 7-1.
The Control Status indicates the status of the Controller.
If the status statements are satisfactory, you now need to perform the following tasks:
· Configure Remote NE Management if required
· Backup SDH/Card Config Data
· Restore IS-IS Static Data if required (only makes sense in the comms
controller has been commissioned with this data)
Figure 7-1: Restoring Configuration Data
· Set the NE status to on-line - this applies the settings from the Controller to
the traffic cards. See Chapter 12: Status Menu for details. Once the NE is
set on-line, you can then proceed to configure other SMA1/4UC facilities.
Note: This chapter also describes the Restore SDH/Card Configuration Data
function. Whilst not being a procedure you should perform after
commissioning, it is included here as this is where it best fits due to its menu
position. You can in fact use this function in place of
commissioning/recommissioning if you have backed up data from a previously
commissioned SMA1/4UC that you want to copy without going through the
same commissioning procedures over again.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Shelf Power-up:
Following a shelf power-up, it takes a finite time for the shelf to regain its configuration.
You must allow the equipment to reconfigure completely before logging in. The
Comms Controller lower amber LED flickering indicates that the start-up sequence is
in progress. When the start-up sequence is complete, the LED on the Comms
Controller Card will remain on.
· EM Comms Link Fail Alarm: This alarm is raised by default on power-up, and
requires a link to EM-OS to clear it. You must set the alarm to ’Not
monitored’ on networks with no EM-OS.
On Completion
Once you have completed all commissioning, after commissioning and configuration
procedures, you can do one of two things with the LCT:
· Leave the LCT connected and use it for local management and monitoring
functions
· Logout to return to the Local Craft Terminal opening window then select
Exit to return to Microsoft Windows. You can then disconnect the LCT
without affecting the SMA1/4UC.
7.2 Remote NE Management

Refer to the related product user manual for a description of the communications
system within SDH networks, and for the function and applicability of Network
Addresses.
Use this function to enter a remote NE’s address. This function then allows you to log
onto the remote NE, which will behave as though it is connected to the local NE. The
Network Planner should supply the remote NE’s address.
All LCT functionality will be available for the remote NE, apart from the Remote NE
Management function, which will be greyed out.
Note: When logging onto the remote NE, your access rights to that NE will be
governed by the user name and password you supply to it. Thus it is possible
to have read-only access to the local NE and read/write access to the remote
NE.
Note: When Comms is established to the remote NE, the remote NE’s Local Craft
Terminal opening window is displayed and the status line (bottom left hand
corner of the LCT screen) indicates ‘Remote’. On exiting from the remote NE
the display returns to the Local NE’s Local Craft Terminal opening window
and the ‘Remote’ indication is removed from the status line.
Path: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window > Status > Remote NE
Management
1 Select Remote NE Management from the path shown to display the Remote
NE Management screen - see Figure 7-2.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Figure 7-2: Remote NE Management
2 Set the NE NSAP Address to the address given by the network planners (in
hexadecimal characters only).
3 Select Apply to send the data to the Comms/Controller, noting that the
Establishing Comms message displays until comms is established with the
remote NE.
4 Select Cancel to return to the Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window.
Note: If the remote NE requires a different build of LCT to the local NE, then
the LCT will inform you, terminate the System Error Monitor display
and return to the Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window.
7.3 Back Up SDH/Card Configuration Data

Once you have commissioned the multiplexer, then you can save part or the whole of
its configuration data to file (backup). It is a good idea to do this:
· After commissioning - to save the shelf configuration and other

commissioning data
· After completing the set up of the SMA1/4UC (changing parameter settings

through the LCT management functions) to save the set up data
· After any subsequent changes to the set up of the SMA1/4UC.
Once data has been backed up, it can then be restored to another NE during the
commissioning procedure, or copied back to the originating NE following a data loss.
Due to the time to carry out a full backup or restore procedure, we recommend that
this feature is only used as a part of a commissioning or re-commissioning procedure.
However, you can restore individual files on a commissioned multiplexer as and when
they are required.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Path: LCT - Local Craft Terminal opening window > Configuration > Backup
SDH/Card Config Data
Path: LCTS - Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window > Status > NE
Configuration > Backup
1 Select Backup SDH/Card Config Data from the path shown to enter the
Operator Password screen.
2 Log in as described in Chapter 4:, LCT Log in.
3 The Backup Config Data screen displays, showing ten selectable options
described below. These include a Node ID and Comments field, which you can
use to enter node-specific details.
Note: If you intend to use the back-up file for commissioning or

recommissioning, then all of the files must be selected and
downloaded simultaneously. Alternatively the individual options may
be selected and backed-up accordingly. However, use discretion
backing up and restoring individual files as inconsistencies may result
in conflicts.
· NE Commissioning Config Data; this file contains shelf configuration

details only.
· Comms Commissioning Config Data; this file contains Transport

Layer, Network Layer and Gateway Interface Parameters - Comms
Configuration details only to enable comms to be commissioned.
· Card Port and Equipment Config Data; this file contains the shelf
configuration, PDH port config, mapping, signal structure, CRC-4,
2Mbit/s output timing, consequential actions, interworking criteria,
SOH byte bypass and section trace information.
· Connections Config Data; this file contains the full cross-connection

config details including path trace (for all terminated paths),
supervisory unequipped and path alarm monitoring information.
· Event Handling Config Data; this file contains the overall alarm and
event handling config data details - fault attributes, fault detectors,
event reporting, alarm scheme, event logs and alarm inversion
information.
· Traffic Path Performance Monitoring Config Data; this file contains

the overall traffic path performance monitoring config data details -
performance parameter thresholds, performance exception
thresholds, enable/disable performance reporting and scheduled
reporting delays.
· Synchronisation Config Data; this file contains the overall

synchronisation config data details - sync mode, SETG mode, SSMB,
SASE mode, external clock, WTR period, 2Mbit/s de-synchroniser
bandwidth, priority tables and unacceptable quality thresholds.
· Protection Config Data; this file contains the overall protection config
data details - core card protection, PDH tributary and STM-1.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
· Comms Config Data; this file contains the overall comms config data
details - message/time based persistency, Link Access Protocol D
(LAPD) and Data Communications Channel (DCC) config parameters
and defaults.
Note: Equipment Monitor Config Data details: Loopbacks, Pseudo Random

Bit Sequence (PRBS) Injection and Error Injection are NOT backed
up.
4 Select the option(s) to back-up from the screen, and select OK.
Note: The download time will vary depending on the number of files
selected at any one time. For a total backup, the backup time may
last from several minutes up to an hour.
5 The NE responds with the Backup Progress screen On successful loading of

a disk a further instruction screen may prompt for a further disk to be entered.
6 Select OK to continue.
· The screen shows the data currently being backed-up, for example
Alarm Configuration.
· You can abort the backup at any time before it completes by selecting
Abort.
7 Allow the download to continue until the process is completed.
8 Select OK in the Successful Download screen to return to the Local Craft

7.4 Restore SDH/Card Configuration Data

Once you have backed up the SMA1/4UC commissioning and configuration data, you
can use the Restore function:
· To restore the data when recommissioning a decommissioned element
· To restore data following a data loss.
Path: LCT - Local Craft Terminal opening window > Configuration > Restore
SDH/Card Config Data
Path: LCTS - Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window > Status > NE
Configuration > Restore
1 Select Restore SDH/Card Config Data from the path shown to enter the
Operator Password screen.
2 Log in as described in Chapter 4:, LCT Log in.
3 This displays the Select Restore SDH/Card Config Data Backup screen.
4 Place the disk provided into the correct drive and select OK.
SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
5 The Restore File Header Data screen displays, showing the relevant choice
of options: File Name, Directory Selected, and Drive.
6 Select the previously backed-up file to be restored, then OK to initiate the

restore procedure.
7 A Warning screen appears stating that the process will take some time to
download. Select OK to continue.
8 The NE responds with the Restore Progress screen On successful loading of

a disk, a further Instruction screen may appear requiring additional disks to
be inserted into the drive.
9 Select OK to continue procedure.
· The screen indicates the file name that is being restored.
· You can abort the process at any time before it completes by

selecting Abort.

7.5 Restore IS-IS Static Data

IS-IS Static Data (ISD) details from the Routing Table Constructor (RTC) can be
restored, thus allowing existing or pre-determined IS-IS Static Data (unique NE RAPs
and manual adjacencies, etc.) to be applied to the NE.
This function is mainly used where IS-IS routing nodes are interworking with ISRA
nodes (earlier equipment using interim routing algorithms).
Note: It is possible that the IS-IS routing protocol will be operating within groups of,
or adjacent to, NEs not operating the same routing protocol or in the same
area. Interworking strategy must be decided during network planning and is
beyond the scope of this manual.
Note: Once you have selected the desired file, it is analysed to extract the file name
of the ‘.isd’ file that corresponds with the attached NE (correspondence being
achieved through the NSAP). The NSAP of the attached NE is that formed by
using the first area and combining it with the System ID and the NSAP
Selector. If a match cannot be found and the command is rejected, then you
are informed of this fact. The reason for the failure is also displayed at the
LCT.
Note: If an ‘.isd’ file can be found, then it is sent to the NE. This file can contain one
or both types of ISD config data, these being a Reachable Address Prefix
configuration message, and a Manual Adjacency configuration message. If the
NE rejects either of these messages, then you are informed of the reason for
failure.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Path: LCT - Local Craft Terminal opening window > Configuration > Restore IS-
IS Static Data
Path: LCTS - Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window > Status > Restore IS-IS
Static Data
1 Select Restore IS-IS Static Data from the path shown to display the operator
Password screen.
2 Log in as described in Chapter 4:, LCT Log in. This displays the Select
Restore Backup File to Restore screen.
3 Place the disk provided into the correct drive, or select the file to be restored
from the hard disk, and select OK.
4 The Restore File Header Data screen displays, showing the relevant choice
of options: File Name, Directory Selected, and Drive.
5 Select OK to start the restore procedure.
6 A Warning screen appears. Select OK to continue.
7 The NE responds with the Restore Progress screen On successful loading of

a disk a further instruction screen may request additional disks to be inserted
into the drive.
· The screen indicates the file name that is being restored.
· You can abort the process at any time before it completes by

selecting Abort.


SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Blank Page

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Release 3.1 Card Pop-Up Menus
Chapter 8:
Card Pop-Up Menus
I
8.1 Introduction
Once you have configured a slot with an appropriate card, the Local Craft Terminal:
SMA1/4UC window shows the card details in that slot. The pop-up menu for that slot
now shows functions that depend on the card configured in the slot.
The following procedures describe these functions.
1 Select the required card/slot. Call up the pop-up menu for that card (see
Chapter 2:, LCT Presentation And Operation for details). This shows a pop-up
menu appropriate to the type of card selected (see Figure 8-1: Example Card
Pop-up Menu
Figure 8-1: Example Card Pop-up Menu
2 Select the required option from the pop-up menu and refer to the appropriate
procedure. Procedures are listed alphabetically in the following sections.
3 Table 8-1 shows which functions are available for which cards.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Table 8-1: Available Facilities Selectable from Individual Cards/units

CORE CORE Generic
FACILITY FOR CORE CORE CORE
Trib ETA/ERA
INDIVIDUAL CARDS Switch Trib
Line Controller Comms
1+1 MSP Yes No No No No Yes No
Alarms - Source Active Yes Yes Yes

Alarms Yes Yes Yes Yes
Alarms Inversion Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes
Alarms
Alarms All Intermittent Yes Yes Yes

Alarms Yes Yes Yes Yes
Analogue Monitoring (STM- No No Yes

1/4) Yes No No No
Bank Status
- Bank Status (Partitioned No No

Cards) No No No No Yes
- Switch Banks (Partitioned No No No

Cards) No No No Yes
- Align Banks (Partitioned No No No

Cards) No No No Yes
- Download (Partitioned No No No
Cards) No No No Yes
- Bank Status (Controller No No No

Card) – No Yes (SMC) No No
- Switch SMC Memory No No No

Banks – No Yes (SMC) No No
No No No
- Upgrade NE No Yes (SMC) No No
- Set Bank Status - see No No No

No Yes (SMC) No No
No No No
- Download - No Yes (SMC) No No
No No No
- Switch Banks - No Yes (SMC) No No
No No No
- Align Banks - No Yes (SMC) No No
No No No
- Delete Banks - No Yes (SMC) No No
Yes No Yes
Card Forced Restoration - No Yes No No
Card Status - No No No No No No Yes
Connect to Test Bus (1.5 No Yes No

and 2M Tribs only) - No No No No

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
CORE CORE Generic

FACILITY FOR CORE CORE CORE
Trib ETA/ERA
INDIVIDUAL CARDS Switch Trib
Line Controller Comms
Yes No No
Core Card Protection - No No No No
Inventory
Yes Yes Yes

- Hardware Inventory Yes Yes No Yes
Yes Yes Yes

- Customer Inventory - Yes Yes No Yes
Yes No Yes
- Software Inventory - No Yes No Yes
- All Inventory - No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes
LED Test - Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes

LED User Override Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes

Re-configure Card/unit - Yes No Yes Yes
Yes No Yes
Reset Card/unit - Yes No Yes Yes
No No No
Set Card Online No No No Yes
No No No
Set Card Operational - No No No Yes
Set Default Card No No No

Configuration - No No No Yes
Signal Label Configuration - No No No

see No No No Yes
No No No
STM-1 to STM-4 Upgrade - Yes No No No
Note: The functions in Available Facilities Selectable from Individual Cards marked
Yes are selectable on a per card basis from the Local Craft Terminal:
SMA1/4UC window. Availability depends on the type of card selected
8.2 1+1 MSP

This describes inter-card protection, but the principles apply to intra-card protection.
At the transmitting SMA1/4UC, the switch unit sends identical signals to both the A and
B STM-N cards for one line direction (East or West). The two STM-N cards
independently process the signal and transmit nominally identical STM-N optical signals
to the two optical fibres, denoted ‘Working channel’ and ‘Protection channel’. Both of
these STM-N cards are considered to be in-traffic, since revenue-earning traffic could
be disrupted if either card is removed (because traffic could be switched to the
protection card just as it is removed).
The ‘in-traffic’ LEDs of both STM-N cards are lit.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
At the receiving SMA1/4UC two separate STM-N cards receive the two signals, process
these and pass them to the switch unit. The ‘in-traffic’ LEDs of both the STM-N cards
are lit. The switch unit selects one of the signals for onward processing.
Upon failure of the selected channel, the switch unit can automatically select the
protection signal in preference to the failed working channel signal.
Failure of a channel is detected by the appropriate STM-N card and signalled directly to
the switch unit.
Note: If MSP is created whilst worker traffic is errored, spurious alarms such as switch
fail may be momentarily raised.
8.3 Inter-card 1+1 MSP

Cards must be of the same generic card type. Any port may be worker protected by any
other available port. It is possible to 'overlap' 1+1 MSP pairs such that it is possible to
have ports on a card paired with the right-hand and left-hand adjacent cards
simultaneously.
1+1 MSP can only be set up between two line cards or two tributary cards. 1+1 MSP
between line and tributary is not possible.
Note: Configuration rules for the Dual STM-1 card:
· The worker and protection interfaces must be on different adjacent cards
· Ports A on the two cards form a protection pair, and Ports B form a protection
pair
· 1+1 MSP is configured on a per port basis, not per card
· Port A on one card and Port B on the other card cannot form a protection pair
· Ports A and B on one of the cards are the designated worker ports.
8.4 Intra-card 1+1 MSP

Here, the worker and protection interfaces are on the same card. There are no
restrictions on the 1+1 MSP pairings.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
8.5 Tributary 1+1 MSP

1+1 Linear MSP on the tributary card is governed by the pairing rules shown in the table
below.
Table 8-2: Tributary Card MSP Pairing Rules
Card/Unit Protn Type Notes
Single-port STM-1 Tribs 1+1 Note A
Dual-port STM-1 Tribs 1+1 Note B
Quad port STM-1 Tribs 1+1 Note B
Note: (A) The cards must be fitted in adjacent slots.
Note: (B) Intra-card MSP and Inter MSP is available for Dual and Quad port STM-1
cards
Table 8-3: Protection Groups for MSP Protection
Worker Protection
Inter Card Trib n Port A Trib n Port B
Intra Card Trib n Port A with Trib n+1 Port A with

Trib n Port B Trib n+1 Port B
Create 1+1 MSP Protection

Path: (Tributary Card) Card pop-up menu > 1+1 MSP > Create
Path: (Core Line Card) Card pop-up menu > 1+1 MSP Core Protection > Intra or
Inter > Line West or Line East > Create
1 Select a protection STM-N or a core line card to display a menu for the card.
2 Select Create from the path shown to display the STM-1 MSP screen as in. The
screen shows the 1+1 MSP state of the selected card.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Figure 8-2: STM-1 1+1 MSP
Note: When bi-directional 1+1 MSP is employed, and it is thought necessary

to remove a traffic-carrying protection card, then apply a Forced Switch
to Worker before removal of the protection card. Failure to do so may
cause errors to be generated.
Note: On the Dual STM-1 Inter card, Port #1/Port #2 can be individually
selected and used for specific STM-1 1+1 MSP protection (select Port
1 on NBT 2 to be protected by Port 1 on NBT 1, etc.). With Intra 1+1
MSP protection however, the selection method is such that Port #1 is
1+1 MSP protected by Port #2 on the same card. The Quad STM-1
card is fully flexible.
Note: For Auxiliary Channel Protection to operate over MSP sections, you
must ensure that the 1+1 MSP Section is configured for bi-directional
working.
3 In the MSP Selection section of the STM-1 MSP screen select a worker slot/port
from the Worker Slot/Port box. Select a protection slot/port from the second
dropdown menu. See the part screen illustration (MSP Selection detail) in
Figure 8-3: MSP Selection

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Figure 8-3: MSP Selection
The text below the Slot/Port boxes details either:
· INTRA card MSP (protection between ports on the same card) or
· INTER card MSP (protection between ports on adjacent cards)
and lists the worker and protection slots configured.
4 Amend the entries in all other permissible fields of the STM-1 MSP screen as
required.
· Mode: Revertive or Non-revertive. Revertive: one of the two identical

STM-N channels, designated Working channel 1 (WCh 1), is the
preferred path for the traffic. The other channel is designated
Protection and is used for traffic only when the working channel fails.
Traffic on the protection channel will be automatically switched back
(revert) to the working channel upon recovery of the worker. In non-

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
revertive mode, traffic does not switch back to the original worker once
it recovers.
Note: When Revertive protection is invoked, a Wait to Restore (WTR) period

of at least 1 minute should be set to avoid chattering.
Note: Although you can configure the preferred operating mode, the
SMA1/4UC can automatically select a different mode for actual
operation under certain specific circumstances. There are two reasons
for this:
- Configuration clash: A SMA1/4UC may be connected to a remote

multiplexer that has been inadvertently configured into a different
operating mode. The SMA1/4UC can detect this condition and
raise any necessary alarms. It can also automatically assume an
appropriate new operating mode to allow for continued traffic
protection.
- Locally detected failure of the protection channel: Since the

signalling for bi-directional working is carried over this channel, the
signalling mechanism is deemed to have failed when a local Signal
Fail (Protn.) is received. If the SMA1/4UC is configured for bi-
directional working, it automatically adopts unidirectional working
during the period that the Signal Fail is active.
· Direction and Protocol:
- Bi-directional: traffic in both directions of transmission is switched

automatically to the protection channel if the working channel fails
(even if the failure is in only one direction).
- Unidirectional: the transmit and receive directions do not relate to

the same worker. The switching decision is based solely on local
traffic performance indications received on the incoming STM-N
channels (or locally generated manual switch commands). The
local receive two-way selector switch is therefore operated to
select the protection channel when the working channel fails.
· Section SD Config:This configuration forms part of the 1+1 MSP

Switching Criteria. If it is Disabled, it will not contribute to the switching
criteria.
-5 -9
- SD Mechanism: Disabled, 10 to 10 , USE or CDEG.
- USE/CDEG On/Off Threshold: between 1-20.
· Operator Command:
- Clear: Clears any active wait to restore (WTR) states. If a WTR

state is cleared, the associated protection group immediately
reverts to worker
- Force Switch To Worker: Causes traffic to be selected from, or

continue to be selected from the designated worker card.
Note: The Force To Worker command has a higher priority than locally
detected failures on the worker channel/card and hence traffic remains

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
selected from the worker card regardless of any failure indications on

the worker channel/card
- Force Switch To Protection: Causes traffic to be selected from,

or continue to be selected from the designated protection card.
Note: The Force Switch To Protection command has a higher
priority than locally-detected failures on the protection channel/
card and hence traffic remains selected from the protection card
regardless of any failure indications on the protection channel/card
- Manual Switch To Worker: Causes traffic to be selected from, or

continue to be selected from the designated worker card unless a
higher priority switch state is in effect. Detected conditions on the
worker channel/card (SF and SD) have a higher priority than this
manual switch command
- Manual Switch To Protection: Causes traffic to be selected from,

or continue to be selected from the designated protection card
unless a higher priority switch state is in effect. This manual switch
command has a lower priority than all other detected conditions for
that protection group.
· Wait to Restore Period:this is the period that the system waits after
recovery from failure before traffic is restored from a protection card to
the original worker when protection is revertive, in the range 0 to 30
minutes (default =10).
· SF on EBER: Enabled or Disabled.
6 Select Cancel in the 1+1 MSP Protection screen to return to the Local Craft
Note: If an NE is configured in a protected ring with 4 STM-1 tributaries fitted,

and:
- Tributaries 1 and 2 connect to a dependent Line West A and B

- Tributaries 3 and 4 connect to a different Line West A and B
then transient ’MSP Protocol Fail’ alarms may be raised when a

’Manual Switch to Protection’ or ’Clear’ command is applied.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Amend 1+1 MSP Protection

Once MSP Protection is set-up, then its various states can be altered.
Note: Operator commands are not backed up/restored on 1+1 protected CellSpan or
P-Switch cards using the LCT.If 1+1 protection has been configured on
CellSpan or P Switch cards, wait 5 minutes (to allow the cards to settle) before
setting any operator commands using the amend screen.
Path: Card pop-up menu > 1+1 MSP > Amend
1 Select a protection STM-N card to display a menu for the card.
2 Select Amend from the path shown to display the Select STM-1 MSP for
Amendment screen as in Figure 8-4
Figure 8-4: Select STM-1 MSP for Amendment
3 Select the MSP type from the list in the Amendment screen and select Amend.
4 The STM-1 MSP screen is then displayed (The screen shows the STM-1 MSP
state with the Worker and Protection Slot/Port boxes greyed out.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Figure 8-5: 1+1MSP Amend Protection State
5 Amend the entries in the permissible fields as required.
7 Select Cancel in the STM-1 MSP screen to return to the Local Craft Terminal:
SMA1/4UC window.
Note: To confirm that a subsequent change of state has occurred, and is

correctly displayed (after applying an operator command, etc.), you
should firstly exit the feature, by selecting Cancel in the Amend
screen. Only re-enter the Amend 1+1 MSP screen after approximately
10 seconds have elapsed.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Delete 1+1 MSP Protection

Once MSP Protection is set-up then it can be deleted by selection of the appropriate
STM-N (Worker) card from the Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window.
Note: This feature must not be applied unless traffic has firstly been forced back to the
worker card and is being carried error free.
Path: Card pop-up menu > 1+1 MSP > Delete
1 Select a protection STM-N card to display a menu for the card.
2 Select Delete from the path shown to display the Select STM-1 MSP for
Deletion screen as in Figure 8-6.
Figure 8-6: Select STM-1 MSP for Deletion
3 Select the MSP Type from the list in the Deletion screen and select Delete to
delete protection from the selected STM-1 card, or select Cancel to return to the
Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window.
4 The Delete 1+1 MSP dialogue box asks for confirmation of the deletion. See
Figure 8-7.
Figure 8-7: Delete 1+1 MSP Card Protection
5 Select Yes to delete protection from the selected card and return to the Local

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Core Card Protection
WARNING!
To Avoid Traffic Disruption During Maintenance When Traffic Cards (Core Cards,
Tributary Cards) Are Inserted Or Removed From The Equipment Shelf, You Must
First Apply A Force Core Protection Switch To Put Traffic Onto The Card That Will
Stay In Service. After Completion Of Maintenance, And Replacement Of The Core
Card, You Can Set The Core Card Protection As Required.
The Core Card Protection scheme protects against failure of the operating card/unit by
providing a second card/unit, installed in the SMA1/4UC and already configured to
duplicate the functioning mode of the original.
Note: Normally, switch card/unit protection is automatic and needs no operator

intervention. However, operator intervention is necessary to implement forced
operation, which may be required during fault finding and maintenance
procedures.
Note: If you apply a Forced Switch in error to a non-existent core card (for example
from A to B when no B is fitted), a Clear command will not restore traffic back to
the original card. To get traffic back, you must apply a Forced Switch back to
the original card.
Path: Core Card pop-up menu > Switch Card > Core Card Protection
1 Select the Switch Card, which is within the core card, to display its pop-up
menu.
Figure 8-8: Core Card Pop-up Menu (Core Card Protection Highlighted)

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
2 Select Core Card Protection to display the Core Card Protection screen
(see.above diagram) The screen has two fields; one is a read-only field that
shows the current Core Card Protection State, the other allows selection of
options to change the state.
Clear (clears any existing operator command setting and returns to the normal
switch card/unit protection mode of operation).
· Forced Switch to A.
· Forced Switch to B.
3 Select Apply to send the data to the Comms/Controller Card, which responds
with a Warning stating that traffic errors may occur.
4 To continue, select Yes in the Warning box.
5 Select Cancel in the Core Card Protection screen to return to the Local Craft
Alarms - Source Active Alarms

Use this function to display currently active alarms recognised by the SMA1/4UC and
applying to the selected card. The display also shows the time and date each alarm
became active.
You can select the source to filter the alarms by source.
Path: Card pop-up menu > Alarms > Source Active Alarms
1 Select a configured card to display a pop-up menu applicable to that card.

2 Select Source Active Alarms from the path shown and then the desired alarm
type from the sub-menu. This displays an Active Alarm screen, from which you
can select active alarms of the types reportable via that card, by source.
Available sources appear in the right hand section of the screen (see Figure
8-9)
Figure 8-9: Source Active Alarms
3 Select the desired Alarm Source to display active alarms from that source.
4 Select OK to return to the Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Alarms - All Intermittent Alarms

This function allows you to view all intermittent alarms that have been raised for a
chosen card.
A Refresh facility exists which refreshes the screen with the latest active intermittent
alarms from the Alarm Log.
Figure 8-10: Intermittent Alarms
Path: Card pop-up menu > Alarms > All Intermittent Alarms
1 Select a configured card to display a pop-up menu applicable to that card.
2 Select All Intermittent Alarms from the path shown to access the Intermittent
Alarm screen, which shows a list of active intermittent alarms reported via that
card (see Figure 8-10)
3 Refresh: refreshes the log and takes you to the last entry.
4 Select OK to exit this screen and return to the Local Craft Terminal:
SMA1/4UC window.
Alarm Inversion
This command allows you to toggle an alarm raised by the selected card between an
inverted and inverted state as you wish:
Figure 8-11: Alarm Inversion Screen

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Analogue Monitoring (STM-1/4Lines Only)

Use this function to view the STM Tx, Rx and Laser Bias parameters for a chosen STM-
N port. The screen is read-only.
Path: Card pop-up menu > Analogue Monitor
1 Select an STM core card to display its pop-up menu.
2 Select Analogue Monitor to display the STM-n Analogue Monitor screen for
that card (see Figure 8-12).
Figure 8-12: STM-4 Analogue Monitoring
Note: STM-1 analogue monitoring is only applicable to line cards
Note: Typical STM Tx laser parameters are shown in the Analogue

Monitoring screen (see). These parameters can vary and may be in
the ranges:
· -33dBm to 0dBm (Rx), however if the result is less than -33dBm this
displays as
< -33dBm,
and if the result is greater than 0dBm, this displays as
> 0dBm
· 10mA to approximately 100mA for Laser Bias Current.
Bank Status
Partitioned cards allow you to download software to them. They each have two memory
banks that you can download the software to. One bank is the current bank containing
the software currently in use. The other bank is the non-current bank.
The non-current bank may or may not contain software. The management functions
allow you to download new software to the non-current bank. You can then either copy
this over to the current bank or switch banks, changing the current bank to non-current
and the non-current to current.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Note: In the SMA1/4UC the Comms and Controller Units are part of the Core A card
and they are accessed through the Bank Status option on the Core A card
Controller popup menu.
Path: Core A Card Controller Unit pop-up menu > Bank Status
After selecting this menu option the following figure is displayed which allows you to
access the software banks on the individual partitioned cards.
Figure 8-13: Software Bank Status
The Bank Status screen displays the bank status of both banks of all software for all
card types. These card types are also known as partitions.
For each card type (partition) and bank, the following information is provided:
· Card type:
· Bank: The Bank ID; 1 or 2
· Status: Status of the bank; Current, Non-Current, Reserved, Inhibited and

empty:
- Current: The software in the bank is being executed.
- Non-Current: The bank contains valid software but it is not being used.
- Reserved: The bank does not contain software, however it is associated

with the Controller/Comms and cannot be deleted.
- Inhibited: The bank has been inhibited from the Controller, and will not be
downloaded to the relevant traffic card.
- Empty: The bank does not contain any software. In this case the 25
characters representing the software version are blanks.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
· Software Version: Details of the bank software version currently running on

the bank.
· Compatibility: A software compatibility code.
Path: Core A Card Controller Unit pop-up menu > Bank Status>Global
Figure 8-14: Bank Status> Global Screen
From the Global menu item you can select:
· Upgrade NE
· Set Bank Status
· Download
· Download Binary
Upgrade NE
Note: This function is not available through the LCTS running under ServiceOn Optical
Element Manager.
You should only use this function to switch the banks of all partitions when all the NE
software has been upgraded.
This function causes all non-current banks to become current and all current banks to
become non-current. All card types that are fitted in the NE are switched in a single
operation. Use this where individual downloads would create an interim state whereby
the individual cards would be incompatible with each other, thus making the NE
unmanageable

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Path: Core A Card Controller Unit menu > Bank Status>Global> Upgrade NE
1 Select Upgrade NE from the path shown to display the Warning screen.
2 Select OK in this Warning screen to continue the Upgrade NE procedure.
3 From the File menu select Close to return to the Local Craft Terminal:
SMA1/4UC window.
Set Bank Status

Path: Core A Card Controller Unit menu > Bank Status>Global>Set Bank Status
This function allows you to configure the bank status for specific partitions to be current,
non-current as required Note that this operation does not perform a download to cards.
It is mainly used when a new SMC card is being fitted into the element, and allows for
the initial configuration of the SMC.
Note: Do not use this feature for the general management of the SMC. Also, note that
the LCT does not allow an invalid configuration.
Select Bank Status from the path shown to display the Bank Status screen. Once into
this screen select the card type and then Global and Set Bank Status. This displays the
Set Bank Status screen
Figure 8-15: Set Bank Status Screen

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Global>Download
Path: Core A Card Controller Unit menu > Bank Status>Global>Download
Note: There is a binary lownlaod available for some of the cards which have large
software application files like the Controller/Comms and Core cards. This option
is provided in order to speed up the download times required for these
card/units.
Path: Core A Card Controller Unit menu > Bank Status>Global> Download
Binary
Partition
Path: Core A Card Controller Unit pop-up menu > Bank Status>Partition
Switch Banks
Path: Core A Card Controller Unit menu > Bank Status>Partition> Switch Banks
You can switch banks on a particular partitioned card, setting current to non-current and
vice versa. If the non-current bank is empty, or if the software versions of the two banks
of a protected pair are different, this option is greyed out.
1 Select Switch Banks from the path shown.
2 Select Yes in the confirmation box to switch the software banks and return to
the Bank Status screen.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Figure 8-16: Switch Banks
Align Banks
Path: Core A Card Controller Unit menu > Bank Status>Partition>Align Banks
Figure 8-17: Align Banks
Use this function to copy the current bank software down to the non-current bank. The
function also allows you to specify which bank is marked as current after the operation
is completed. The status of the bank that is being copied to must be Inactive or Empty.
It is not permitted to copy to the Active bank.
Delete Bank
Path: Core A Card Controller Unit menu > Bank Status>Partition>Delete Bank
Figure 8-18: Delete Bank

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Card Forced Restoration

Use this function to force the restoration of the software of the selected card.
This reloads the content of the software bank that is active for the specified card, back
onto the card. A forced download results in the control unit downloading software to the
designated card/slot even if its current software version is the same as the version to be
loaded. The software is loaded without the loss of traffic or any other adverse effect on
the card.
Path: Card pop-up menu > Force Restoration
1 Select a configured card to display its pop-up menu.
2 Select Force Restoration from the path shown. You are asked to confirm your
action.
3 Select Yes. This sends the Force Restoration instruction to the

Comms/Controller Card. The Comms/Controller Card will respond and the
card’s amber LED flashes during the restoration.
4 Processing returns to the Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window.
Connect to Test Bus (2M Units on Core Cards only)

A test bus is used to monitor the received signal at 2Mbit/s on the Core Trib ports.
Physical access to the test bus is on the Comm/Aux/Ancillary unit.
Path: Card pop-up menu > Connect to Test Bus
1 Select a 2M bit/s port at which it is desired to monitor the signal, to display a

pop-up menu for the port.
2 Select Connect to Test Bus to display the Connect to Test Bus screen see
Figure 8-19).. The screen has two input fields Trib Card and Trib Port.
Figure 8-19: Connect To Test Bus
3 Set the Trib Card field content to the required value (Core 2M Trib A or Core
2M trib B or None).
4 Set the Trib Port field to the required value (1 to 32 or None).

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Inventory
Use the appropriate Inventory function to view inventory details of all cards when the
NE is on-line. When the NE is off-line only the inventory details of the Controller Card
are available.
You can request inventory data for any card/unit physically fitted into the NE
irrespective of whether it has been logically added to the NE or not, apart from the 2M
LTUs. You can also read inventory out of the optical SFP modules (line interfaces).
There are up to four inventory functions, depending on the card/unit chosen, as follows:
· Hardware Inventory: showing Unit Code, Build State, Serial No, etc.)
· Customer Inventory: the information consists of a memo entry of up to 156

characters. Only printable ASCII characters in the range 20H (space) to 7EH
(~) are allowed. Word wrap is used on this screen, to maintain legibility of
display.
· Software Inventory: displays the version of boot software and application

software (issue state, build state, etc.) with which any card, except a PSU or
auxiliary card, has been supplied. The Software Inventory screen varies due
to the different types of card having different numbers of Software partitions.
Cards with no EPROM have no software and so do not need an inventory.
· All Inventory: displays hardware, software and customer inventory details for
any selected card fitted in the SMA1/4UC .
The four functions are essentially similar, but yield different results as their names
suggest.
You can access these functions through the card pop-up menu selected from the Local
Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window. Each xxx Inventory screen is read-only apart from
the customer inventory, which you can write to.
Note: Data is only reliable when the Comms/Controller is ‘On-Line’.
Path: Card pop-up menu > Inventory > xxx Inventory
1 Select a configured card to display a pop-up menu.
2 Select xxx Inventory from the path shown to display the xxx Inventory screen.
The screen is read-only and shows all the relevant details (see Figure 8-20).
Figure 8-20: Hardware Inventory

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
SMA1/4UC window.
Note: When multiple units are selected (for example Optical Interface Card),
the master card is usually the card shown on the LCT screen.
However, all constituent inventories are also shown.
LED User Override

Either the LCT or EM operator can set the card LEDs on an individual card basis to light
as required ('Forced on’ or ‘Automatic’). You can do this on all cards - apart from on the
power supply units.
Path: Card pop-up menu > LED Options > LED User Override
2 Select LED User Override from the path shown to display the LED Override
screen. This shows the current state of the function:
· Forced On (lit regardless)
· Auto (lit if alarms are current)
3 Change the setting to the required value.
LED Test
The on-card LEDs can be tested on a per-card basis. Do this by selecting the
appropriate card from the Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window. All LEDs on the
selected card/unit light for two seconds and are then unlit for two seconds. They then
return to the lit/unlit state they were in before the test.
Path: Card pop-up menu > LED Options > LED Test
2 Select LED Test from the path shown to display a Question box.
3 To test the red and amber LEDs select Yes.
4 If the command is successful, then you are returned to the Local Craft
Note: The Fault LED on the Comms/Controller Card will not light up if the test
is initiated from the Comms, but will light if initiated from the Controller.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
8.6 Optical Module Configuration (Flexible Dual STM-1)
WARNING!
Be aware that when optical module units are fitted and installed, an optical signal
may be generated despite the modules being unconfigured.
Both optical modules (Port 1 and Port 2) of a Flexible Dual STM 1 card can be
individually configured.
Note: Flexible dual STM-1 cards can be fitted in generic trib slots. Flexible Dual STM-
1 Card pop-up menu > Optical Module Config
1 Select a flexible dual STM-1 card to display its pop-up menu.
2 Select Optical Module Config to display the STM-n Optical Module Config
screen for that card (see Figure 8-21).
Figure 8-21: Configure Optical Modules
Note: If only one module is required, it must be fitted in Port 1 (lower).
3 Click on Port 1. A pop-up menu appears showing all the available optical
modules available for that port. Select a suitable module. (See the menus in
Figure 8-21).
4 Repeat Step 3 for Port 2.
5 When the ports are configured as appropriate, select Apply and then Cancel to
return to the Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
SFP (Small Form Factors) in Core Line Cards East/West

The SFP optical modules in the Line Slots in the Core Cards of the SMA1/4UC are
configured in a similar way. These are displayed as STM1 and STM4 units on the core
Card see Figure 8-22:
Figure 8-22: SFPs on Core Cards
SFP Unit
On clicking on these units, they display pop-up menus similar to those in Figure 8-21.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Re-configure Card/unit
Use this function to reconfigure a configured card/unit For the core card, you can
reconfigure the functional blocks (for example the switch, core tributary and optical
modules).
Reconfiguration causes the configuration parameters of the selected card to be set to

those values stored in the Core A card . This is done without the loss of traffic or any
other adverse effect on the card.
Note: This feature is only available for configured slots.
Path: Card pop-up menu > Reconfigure Card/Unit
1 Select a card/unit to display a pop-up menu.
2 Select Re-configure Card/Unit to display a reconfigure card/unit Question box

asking for confirmation of your action.
3 Select Yes. This sends the re-configure instruction to the Core /CCU Card. If all
is satisfactory, you are automatically returned to the Local Craft Terminal:
SMA1/4UC window.
Reset Card/unit
Use this function to reset a configured card/unit For the Core A card, reset applies to
the whole unit.
WARNING!
NOTE THAT A LOSS OF TRAFFIC MAY OCCUR ON THE SELECTED CARD.
Reset causes the selected card to be reset and the start-up sequence is effected as at
power-up. The selected card is, as near as is possible, completely reset (restored to its
original state).
Path: Card pop-up menu > Reset Card/Unit
1 Select a specific card/unit to display a pop-up menu.
2 Select Reset Card/Unit to display the card reset Warning screen that provides a
warning message that traffic may be affected by the resetting the card.
3 Select OK to send details to the Core A card Card. The Comms/Controller Card
responds and returns you to the Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Set Default Card Configuration

This function allows you to set a Non-Specific System Card back to its default
configuration.
Path: Non-Specific System Card pop-up menu > Set Default Card Config
1 Select the appropriate card from the Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window
to display its pop–up menu.
2 Select Set Default Card Configuration.
3 A screen warns you that this function will overwrite any current configuration
with the default one. Select Yes to continue.
On successful completion, the card configuration is reset to the default settings and you
are returned to the Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window.
Signal Label Configuration

For Non-Specific System Cards, use this function to configure the signal label
transmitted/expected for high and low order VC-n cross connections (SDH Domain
only). This function operates on a per-card basis.
Path: Non-Specific System Card pop-up menu > Signal Label Configuration
1 Select a configured Non-Specific System Card to display its pop-up menu.
2 Select Signal Label Configuration to display the Signal Label Configuration

screen
3 The following values are available:
Table 8-4: Signal Label Configuration VC Type
VC types Range Default
VC-3 / VC-4 01 - FE (Hex) 01H
VC-12 / VC-2 001 - 110 (binary) 001
4 Select Apply to apply your changes and return to the Local Craft Terminal:
SMA1/4UC window.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
STM-1 to STM-4 Upgrade

Use this function to upgrade a card from STM-1 to STM-4.
The function performs the appropriate upgrade and maintains existing traffic
connections.
Note: Observe the safety precautions and card replacement details (see the
Maintenance Manual for details) whilst performing the following procedures.
Note: All protection features (for example MSP) must first be disabled.
Note: If the STM-N card/unit to be upgraded is in use as a source in any of the

synchronisation priority tables, re-configure the table(s) first.
Note: If adjacent slots are required for the upgrade and such adjacent slots are not
currently ‘unconfigured’ the upgrade will not be permitted.
The operation of mixed STM-n line interfaces is allowed (for example Line East
operating at STM-1 and Line West operating at STM-4, etc.
CAUTION!
THE STM CARDS MUST NOT BE REMOVED FROM THE SMA1/4UC OR
DISCONNECTED WITHOUT FIRSTLY TAKING INTO CONSIDERATION: THE
OPTICAL SAFETY RULES OUTLINED IN THIS MANUAL AND THE USER MANUAL
AND CARD REPLACEMENT DETAILS IN THE ASSOCIATED MAINTENANCE
MANUAL.
Path: Card pop-up menu > STM-4 Upgrade
1 Select a specific line STM-1 card to display a menu for that card.
2 Select STM-4 Upgrade and then select the required STM-4 card type. A
Warning screen displays.
4 This displays the STM-4 Upgrade cards in the correct positions on the Local
5 Make sure that any change between the STM-1 and STM-4 state is reflected in
the Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window depicting the shelf layout.
If re-configuration from STM-4 to STM-1 is required, then you must do this from the
Shelf Configuration function.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Ethernet Domain (Packetspan cards)

Path: Packetspan Card pop-up menu > Ethernet Domain
Once a Packetspan card has been configured the operational/control status must be
enabled. This can be done by using the Ethernet Domain menu as shown below.
First Set Operative to commission the card and then use the Status. Menu to Set
Online.
Figure 8-23: Ethernet Domain
Figure 8-24: Ethernet Domain Menu Screen

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Figure 8-25: Ethernet Domain>Status

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Blank Page

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Release 3.1 File Menu
Chapter 9:
File Menu
Log Out
The Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window is controllable via the standard
Windows control buttons for Minimise, Maximise/Restore and Quit - refer to the
Windows documentation for details. Selecting Quit leads to a request for confirmation.
Alternatively, follow the procedure below.
Path: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window > File > Logout
1 Select Logout from the path shown above and in Figure 9-1: Local Craft
Terminal: SMA1/4UC. This leads to a question/warning message. Select Yes to
return to the Local Craft Terminal opening window.
Figure 9-1: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window (Logging Out)
Exit
Path: Local Craft Terminal opening window > File > Exit
1 Select Exit from the path shown from the Local Craft Terminal opening
window.
This leads to a question/warning message. Select Yes to close down the LCT
software.
Note: You can now disconnect the LCT. This leaves the Comms/Controller
operational and on-line. The SMA1/4UCs configuration and operation
are not affected and, in particular, traffic is not disturbed.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Release 3.1 File Menu
Blank Page

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Release 3.1 Performance Menu
Chapter 10:
Configuration Menu
Figure 10-1: Configuration Menu

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Configuration
Figure 10-2: Shelf Menu
The first function from the Shelf menu, Configuration > Shelf > Configuration is
described in Chapter 6:, Commissioning, since you need to configure the shelf as part
of the commissioning procedure when installing a new SMA1/4UC or when
recommissioning a decommissioned SMA1/4UC .
This chapter covers the rest of the functions available from the Configuration menu.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
1:N Tributary Protection
CAUTION!
THE ONLY FORM OF 1:N PROTECTION AVAILABLE FOR THE SMA1/4UC IS 1:1
AND THIS IS ONLY AVAILABLE FOR CARDS THAT HAVE LTU ACCESS. IF THE
CARD DOES NOT HAVE LTU ACCESS THEN THE PRODUCT DOES NOT GIVE AN
EXPLICIT WARNING THAT THIS FORM OF CARD PROTECTION IS NOT
AVAILABLE
Path: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window > Configuration > Shelf > 1:N
Tributary Protection
1 Select 1:N Tributary Protection from the path shown to display the 1:N
Protection set-up screen, (see Figure 10-3).
Figure 10-3: 1:N Protection (SMA1/4UC)
2 Right-click the appropriate tributary card and select either Protection/Worker -

and Create or Amend to create or amend 1:N Tributary Protection. Amend and
Delete are greyed out if Create is selectable. (See Figure 10-4).

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Figure 10-4: 1:N Protection Menu (SMA1/4UC)
3 The Create/Amend 1:N Tributary Protection screen for that card displays.
Figure 10-5: Create or Amend 1:N Card Protection
Note: The above figure shows the protection state of the selected card.
5 Select Cancel in the 1:N Protection screen to return to the Local Craft
Terminal: SMA1/4UC window. The screen now displays the protection details
as in, which indicates that the protected card is fitted and is operational for Slot
T2.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Figure 10-6: 1:N Protection (SMA1/4 UC)
6 Click on the OK button and the 1:N Add Worker Card screen is displayed.
7 Select OK to send the data to the Comms/Controller Card.
8 The traffic is now on worker, returning to the 1:N Protection screen shown in
Figure 10-7 will confirm the state of the traffic

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Figure 10-7: 1:N Protection (SMA1/4 UC)
Core Tributary Protection (SMA1/4UC)

To use Core Trib Protection you need to have configured both core A and core B with
their respected Core Trib cards. as shown in Figure 10-8. To configure this functionality
move the mouse over the switch in the Core card that you have chosen as the worker
and right click and select the Core Card Protection menu item
Figure 10-8: SMA1/4UC Core Trib Protection

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
The screen shown in Figure 10-9 is displayed indicating that Switch A has been
selected and that Core Trib Protected has been automatically enabled with the Core B
Trib card protecting the Core A Trib card. To switch roles you can use Forced Switched
to B
Figure 10-9: Core Card Protection Screen
Details
Use this function to display the Shelf Details screen (showing slot number, card state,
configuration state, card type, resource state, protection state and whether alarms exist
for the slot). The screen is view only.
Path: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window > Configuration > Shelf > Details
1 Select Details from the path shown to display the Shelf Details screen (see
Figure 10-10), which shows details of the equipment fitted in the shelf.
Figure 10-10: Shelf Details
SMA1/4UC window.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
10.1 Inventory Details

There are three Inventory functions:
· Print Hardware inventory details
· Print Software inventory details
· Print All (hardware and software inventory details)
The three functions all operate in a similar way to that described for Print Hardware
inventory details described below.
Individual card inventories can be accessed from the card level pop-up menus, directly
from the Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window.
Note: A request for inventory details can only be accepted when the NE is on-line. All
details for physically fitted cards will be supplied on request (apart from the data
associated with the auxiliary cards/slots for this product release), even if the
cards have not been logically added to the NE.
Path: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window > Configuration > Shelf > Inventory
> Print Hardware
1 Select Print Hardware from the path shown to display the Print screen. Refer to
2.8, Print Function in Chapter 2:, LCT Presentation And Operation for details of
the print function.
2 Set the print options as required and then select OK to print the shelf hardware
inventory details.
3 Select Cancel to exit this screen and return to the Local Craft Terminal:
SMA1/4UC window.
Adopt New Units

In addition to the individual Adopt Card function, you can globally adopt a shelf
configuration with the Adopt New Units function.
This allows you to request that the configuration of any cards physically fitted in the
shelf, in slots that are currently unconfigured, is adopted into the LCT.
If it is not possible for whatever reason then a ’cannot adopt’ warning is returned.
Path: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window > Configuration > Shelf > Adopt
New Units
1 Select Adopt New Units from the path shown.
2 The system asks you to confirm your action. Select Yes to continue.
3 Physically installed cards in currently unconfigured slots are adopted and the
shelf layout on the Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window is updated
accordingly.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
NE Name
The EM operator can give the NE a name using up to 48 ASCII characters. The name is
used to identify the NE on screen and on reports.
Use this function to view the name. You cannot enter or amend any details through this
function as the screen is read only.
Path: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window > Configuration > Shelf >
SMA1/4UC
1 Select SMA1/4UC from the path shown. This calls up the SMA1/4UC bulletin
board.
Figure 10-11: NE Name
SNC Persistency
Use this function to display and globally amend SNC (Protection) Persistency checking
on connections.
Note: When a global change is applied, then all locally generated card or connection
SNC persistency levels are overridden.
Path: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window > Configuration > Global Reset >
SNC Persistency
1 Select SNC Persistency from the path shown to display the Global SNC
Protection Persistency screen. The screen allows you to set the SNC
Protection Persistency, see Figure 10-12 for details.
Figure 10-12: Global SNC Protection Persistency
2 Set the content of the Persistence field as required. The available range settings
are 0.0-20 seconds in 0.1-second steps.
Note: The WTR period must be set to greater than the persistency period.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Section SD Configuration
Use this function to view the current setting of section Signal Degrade Thresholds, or
change the settings on a global basis. This configuration forms part of the 1+1 MSP
Switching Criteria. If it is Disabled, it will not contribute to the switching criteria.
Signal Degrade > Section SD Config
1 Select Section SD Config from the path shown to access the screen shown
in.Figure 10-13.
Figure 10-13: Section SD Configuration
Note: USE parameters must not be set to 0 for this product release.
2 Change the settings as required in the following ranges:
-5 -9
· SD Mechanism: Disabled, 10 to 10 , USE or CDEG.
· USE/CDEG Thresholds: between 1-20.
4 You are asked to confirm your action as this will reset any previously-configured
values for individual sections. Select OK to continue.
5 Select Cancel in the Section SD Config screen to return to the Local Craft

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Path SD Configuration
Use this function to view the current setting of path Signal Degrade Thresholds, or
change the settings on a global basis.
Signal Degrade > Path SD Config
1 Select Path SD Config from the path shown to access the screen shown
in.Figure 10-14
Figure 10-14: Path SD Configuration
USE parameters must not be set to 0 for this product release.

-5 -9
values for individual paths. Select OK to continue.
5 Select Cancel in the Path SD Config screen to return to the Local Craft

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Port SD Configuration
Use this function to view the current setting of port Signal Degrade Thresholds, or
change the settings on a global basis.
Signal Degrade > Port SD Config
1 Select Port SD Config from the path shown to access the screen shown in
Figure 10-15.
Figure 10-15: Port SD Configuration
Note: USE parameters must not be set to 0 for this product release.
-5 -9
values for individual ports. Select OK to continue.
5 Select Cancel in the Port SD Config screen to return to the Local Craft

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
MSP Protection
If Multiplex Section Protection is set to revertive, use this function to set the period of
time (Wait to Restore (WTR)) following restoration of the worker channel after which the
traffic switches back to the worker channel.
Wait to Restore > MSP Protection
1 Select MSP Protection from the path shown to display the Global MS
Protection WTR Period screen. The screen presents the current Global MS
Protection WTR Period setting, see Figure 10-16 for details.
Figure 10-16: Global MS Protection WTR Period
2 Set the content of the WTR Period field as required in the range 0-30 minutes
in 1-minute steps.
values for individual sections. Select OK to continue.
Path Protection
If Path Protection is set to revertive, use this function to set the period of time (Wait to
Restore (WTR)) following restoration of the worker path after which the traffic switches
back to the worker path.
Wait to Restore > Path Protection
1 Select Path Protection from the path shown to display the Global Path
Protection WTR Period screen. The screen shows the current Global Path
Protection WTR Period setting, see Figure 10-17 or details.
Figure 10-17: Global Path Protection WTR Period

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
2 Set the content of the WTR Period field as required in the range 0-30 minutes in
1-minute steps.
values for individual paths. Select OK to continue.
Port Protection
If Port Protection is set to revertive, use this function to set the period of time (Wait to
Restore (WTR)) following restoration of the worker port after which the traffic switches
back to the worker port.
Wait to Restore > Port Protection
1 Select Port Protection from the path shown to display the Global Port
Protection WTR Period screen. The screen shows the current Global Port
Protection WTR Period setting, see Figure 10-18 for details.
Figure 10-18: Global Port Protection WTR Period
2 Set the content of the WTR field as required in the range 0-30 minutes in 1-
minute steps.
values for individual ports. Select OK to continue.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Alarm Configuration State

Path: SMA1/4UC window > Configuration >Alarm Configuration >State
This window is used to enable/disable the four output alarms interfaces. The default
state is disabled.
Figure 10-19: Alarm Output State Configuration
Set NSSC Real Card Types

Non-Specific System Card (NSSC) types are alias identities that can be applied to
System Cards that conform to certain generic behavioural rules in the SDH Domain.
The purpose of these card types is to allow new products to be configured in an
SMA1/4UC shelf before specific management support for them is implemented in the
Comms/Controller and/or the LCT and Element Manager. Follow the procedure below
to set up a Non Specific System Card.
Note: On configuring a Non Specific System Card, the Real Card Type must also be
configured.
Path: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window > Configuration > Set NSSC Real
Card Types
1 Select Set NSSC Real Card Types from the path shown to display the screen.
2 Set the Real Card Type and Real Variant according to the specification supplied
with the appropriate card.
4 Select Cancel to exit the screen and return to the Local Craft Terminal:
SMA1/4UC window.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
CAUTION!
If you set as an NSSC a card like a Packetspan ETO-100 card in quad mode the
LCT allows you to configure VC-12 connections to be made on the AU#3 and
AU#4 of the ETO even though this is not supported. This causes all fitted switch
cards to report failed against the linecard that has the VC-12 connect made to it.
Transport Layer
Comms can be defined during commissioning as described in Chapter 6:,
Commissioning. Use this function to change the values defined during commissioning,
or if comms were not previously commissioned, use this function along with Gateway
Interface Configuration and Network Layer Configuration to define your comms
parameters.
The Transport Layer Configuration screen (Figure 10-20) allows you to amend the:
· Initial Retransmission Time
· Retransmission Count and
· Window Timeout.
The Network Planner supplies the three transport layer components. Initially, the screen
contains defaults supplied by the Comms/Controller at commissioning.
Path: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window > Configuration > Comms >
Transport Layer
1 Select Transport Layer from the path shown to display the Transport Layer
Configuration screen (Figure 10-20). This example shows the
Comms/Controller default values.
Figure 10-20: Transport Layer Configuration
2 Amend the values in the three transport layer component fields.
· Initial Re-transmission Time (T1): 8 to 64 seconds in 1-second steps

(default 8)
· Re-transmission Count: 2 to 15 (in 1-unit steps) (default 4)

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
· Window Timeout: 1 to 64 seconds in 1-second steps (default 16

second)
4 Select Print to print parameters to a file or a hard copy.
Gateway Interface
Comms can be defined during commissioning as described in Chapter 6:,
Commissioning. Use this function to change the values defined during commissioning,
or if comms were not previously commissioned, use this function along with Transport
Layer Configuration and Network Layer Configuration to define your comms
parameters.
The Information to set up the gateway interface configuration is usually supplied by the
Network Planner. However, the SMA1/4UC also has predetermined default conditions
(from the Comms/Controller at commissioning) and these are shown in. Figure 10-21.
Gateway Interface
1 Select Gateway Interface from the path shown to display the Gateway Interface
Configuration screen (Figure 10-21).
Figure 10-21: Gateway Interface Configuration
Applicable values for each field are listed below:
· Gateway Interface Type: None or Ethernet (The default type is None

which depicting a non-gateway type.)

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
· NE Ethernet Address: This hex address consists of 12 characters (6

bytes) in the range 0-9 and A, C or E (the second hex digit must be
even)
Note: This NE Ethernet Address is a hex address consisting of 12 characters

(6 bytes) in the range 0-9 and A-F (Default 000000000000) The
second byte must be even.
Note: NSAP (Ethernet address) is only applicable to a gateway NE,

otherwise select None in the Gateway I/F field.
· Metric values: in the range 1-63 Default is 10
· External Domain: (True or False) Default is false
· IS Priority: 1-127. Default is 64.
Amend each data field as necessary.
3 Select Print to send parameters to a file or a hard copy if required.

Comms can be defined during commissioning as described in Chapter
6:Commissioning. Use this Network Layer Configuration function to change the values
defined during commissioning, or if comms were not previously commissioned, use this
function along with Gateway Interface Configuration and Network Layer Configuration to
define your comms parameters.
The Information to set up the gateway interface configuration is usually supplied by the
Network Planner. However, the SMA1/4UC also has predetermined default conditions
(from the Comms/Controller at commissioning) and these are shown in. Figure 10-22
These details should not be altered without consulting the Network Planner.
1 Select Network Layer from the path shown to display the Network Layer
Configuration screen (Figure 10-22).

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Figure 10-22: Network Layer Configuration
Applicable values for each field are listed below:
Note: The NSAP Selector field is greyed out and cannot be changed.
· Mode: Routing Level Mode Level 1 or Level 2 Default is Level 2
Note: System ID Length must be defined before the System ID field can be
accessed.
Note: Modification of the System ID length will invalidate any existing NSAP
and also result in the deletion of all existing manual adjacencies.
· System ID: First, select a value for the System ID Length in the range
0-8 characters (default 0). 0 is an invalid value so a value within the
specified range must be selected to continue. Then enter the value for
the System ID (in Hexadecimal characters only). The number of
characters must be equal to twice that specified for the System ID
Length. (System ID is greyed out until the System ID Length has been
specified).
· NPDU Lifetime Control(s): 1 to 127 (default 30) second.
· Maximum Area Addresses: 1 to 8, (default 3)
Note: Enter the value for each Manual Area Address (in Hexadecimal
characters only). For further information, see Manual Area Address
below.
3 Select Print to print parameters to a file or hard copy if required.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Manual Area Address

A network address is known as a Network Service Address Point (NSAP). Each NSAP
includes an area address and a system identifier. Level 1 network routing uses the
system identifiers to route between nodes in the same area. Level 2 routing uses the
area addresses.
Figure 10-23: NSAP Address Structure
AREA
AFI IDI HO-DSP System ID N SEL
NSAP
The following rules must be observed:
· Up to 36 characters are permitted (must be an even number).
· The NE must have at least one NSAP
· The number of configured NSAPs may not exceed the value of the Maximum
Area Addresses
· All NSAPs must have the same area address.
· All NSAPs must have a different System ID.
· An area address length must be between 2 and 36 characters inclusive
· An area address must be an even number of characters.
· An area address is always displayed in its entirety (AFI, IDI and HO-DSP are
never displayed).
· The number of characters in each System ID must be twice the Routing

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
IS-IS/ES-IS System Configuration

system within SDH networks, for the function and applicability of network addresses.
Use this function to view and amend the current IS-IS/ES-IS system configuration. The
information to be entered in the fields shown on the screen is normally supplied by the
Network Planner. However, the SMA1/4UC predetermined default conditions are shown
in Figure 10-24.
Note: In the IS-IS/ES-IS System Configuration screen the abbreviation IS-IS stands
for Intermediate System-Intermediates System routing, whilst ES-IS means End
System-Intermediates System routing.
Path: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window > Configuration > Comms > IS-IS
Config > IS-IS/ES-IS System Config
1 Select IS-IS/ES-IS System Config from the path shown to display the screen in
Figure 10-24.
Figure 10-24: IS-IS/ES-IS System Configuration
· Figure 10-24 shows the system default values. These can be set as a
whole with Step 3.
2 Set the timers, intervals and miscellaneous input fields to those supplied by the
Network Planners and proceed to Step 5.
The overall parameters are listed below (defaults in brackets):
· ISIS Hello Timer: 1-255 (3)
· Redirection: 1-255 (45)
· DRISIS Hello Timer: 1-255 (1)

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
· IS Configuration Timer: 1-255 (20)
· Poll ES Hello Rate: 1-255 (50)
· Default ES Hello Timer: 1-1024 (600)
· Max LSP Generation Interval: 1-1024 (900)
· Complete SNP Interval: 1-255 (10)
· Min LSP Generation Interval: 1-255 (30)
· Partial SNP Interval: 1-255 (2)
· Min LSP Transmission Interval: 1-255 (5)
· Min Broadcast LSP Transmission Interval (ms): 1-255 (33)
· Max Path Splits: 1-2 (1)
· L1 LSP Buffer Sizes: 512-1492 (1492)
· Waiting Time: 1-255 (60)
· L2 LSP Buffer Sizes: 512-1492 (1492)
· Adjacency Monitoring: On or Off (Off)
To reset all values back to their default settings, select Default to display the screen in
Figure 10-25: IS-IS Warning
Figure 10-25: IS-IS Warning
3 To set the IS-IS/ES-IS System Configuration and DCC IS-IS Metrics to the
default values, select OK.
5 Select Print to print parameters to a file or a hard copy.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
10.2 DCC IS-IS Metrics

When comms is used over a Data Communications Channel (DCC) i.e. over a
transponder, that channel has a metric associated with it. The metric depends on the
payload type that the transponder is running.
Use this function to view and amend DCC-IS-IS Metric values, or set the Metrics to
predetermined default values (DCCr 20 & DCCm 15).
DCC IS-IS Metrics

Config > DCC IS-IS Metrics
1 Select DCC IS-IS Metrics from the path shown to display the DCC IS-IS Metrics
screen (Figure 10-26).
Figure 10-26: DCC IS-IS Metrics
2 To amend DCC IS-IS Metrics, first select a port and then Amend. The Amend
DCCr IS-IS Metrics screen shown in:Figure 10-27.
Figure 10-27: Amend DCCr IS-IS Metrics

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
3 Set the Metric Value for Level 1 and 2 in the range 1 to 63, and the External
Domain as required and select OK.
4 Figure 10-27 displays the port and its new values. For amendments to further
ports, repeat the procedure from Step 2 as necessary. To set the default values,
continue to the following procedure.
5 Select Apply in the DCC IS-IS Metrics screen to send the data to the
Comms/Controller Card.
Note: If you select Cancel before you select Apply, a Warning message
tells you that you will lose all changes unless you apply them first.
Set DCC IS-IS Metrics and IS-IS/ES-IS System Config to

Default
1 To set the metrics values to their default values, select Default in the DCC IS-IS
Metrics screen. Figure 10-28 displays.
Figure 10-28: IS-IS metrics Warning
2 To set all the DCC IS-IS Metrics and IS-IS/ES-IS System Configurations to the
default values, select OK.
3 Select Apply in the DCC IS-IS Metrics screen to send the data to the
Note: If you select Cancel before you select Apply, a Warning message
tells you that you will lose all changes unless you apply them first.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Reachable Address Prefixes (RAP)

Use this function to view the Reachable Address Prefixes (RAPs). You can also print
and create/amend/delete RAPs when necessary.
The maximum number of RAPs that can be entered is 30.
Note: If the Port is Type Q, then the Port ID is not displayed. Only the Sub-Network
Point of Attachment (SNPA) is displayed. If the port type is DCCr or DCCm
however, then Port ID does display but the SNPA is not displayed.
Note: When a RAP is configured onto the Q interface, then the SNPA field is
configured with the host LAN card MAC address.
Config > Reachable Address Prefixes
1 Select Reachable Address Prefixes from the path shown to display the screen
as in Figure 10-29.
Figure 10-29: Reachable Address Prefixes
2 To create RAPs, select Create from the Functions menu in the Reachable
Address Prefixes window to display the Create Reachable Address Prefix
screen shown in Figure 10-30.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Figure 10-30: Create Reachable Address Prefix - Port Type Q Selected
Note: If the Port Type is DCCr or DCCm, then the SNPA field is replaced by the Port
ID fields as in Figure 10-31.
Figure 10-31: Create RAP (Port Type DCCr or DCCm Selected)
3 The overall parameters are as follows (defaults in brackets):
· Prefix: a subset of the NSAP, up to 36 characters - this field must be

of even length
· Port Type: Q, DCCr or DCCm
· SNPA: 12 Hexadecimal characters (only required for the Ethernet Q

interface)
· Port ID: Core Line East/West, Core B Line East/West Tribs 1 to 2 -

For Tributaries 1 to 2, you can also set the OH Bus 1, OH Bus 2 (Card
type dependent)

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
· Metric Value: 1-63 (5)
· Metric Type: Int or Ext (Int)
4 Select OK to add the RAP to the list in the Reachable Address Prefix screen
Figure 10-32: RAP Screen
5 Select Apply in the Reachable Address Prefix screen to apply any changes.
Note: If you select Cancel before you Apply a Warning message tells you
that you will lose all changes unless you apply them first
6 Select Close from the File menu in the parent Reachable Address Prefixes
screen and OK warning message to return to the Local Craft Terminal:
SMA1/4UC window.
Amend Reachable Address Prefix

1 To view and amend RAPs, open the Reachable Address Prefixes screen and
select Amend from the Functions menu to display the Amend Reachable
Address Prefix screen. This is similar to the Create Reachable Address
Prefix screen shown in Figure 10-30 and Figure 10-31
2 Amend the parameters as required (see Creating Reachable Address Prefixes

for details of the parameter settings).
3 Select OK to add the amended Reachable Address to the Reachable Address

Prefixes screen (Figure 10-29).
4 Select Apply in the Reachable Address Prefixes screen to apply any

changes.
Note: If you select Cancel before you select Apply a Warning message tells
you that you will lose all chnages unless you apply them first.
5 Select Close from the File menu in the parent Reachable Address Prefixes
screen and OK warning message to return to the Local Craft Terminal:
SMA1/4UC window.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Delete Reachable Address Prefix

1 To delete RAPs, open the Reachable Address Prefixes screen and select the
RAP you want to delete from the list.
2 Select Delete from the Functions menu to display the screen.
3 To delete the selected RAP, select Yes.
4 You are returned to the Reachable Address Prefixes screen where the
selected RAP will have been deleted.
5 Select Apply in the Reachable Address Screen to apply any changes.
you that you will lose all chnages unless you apply them first
6 Select Close from the File menu in the Reachable Address Prefixes screen
and OK warning message to return to the Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC
window.
Manual Adjacencies
To support end systems that do not run ES-IS, a method is required to enter this
information manually, and this is called Manual Adjacency.
These manual adjacencies are mapped against either DCC ports or the Ethernet Q Port
and are user accessible.
Config > Manual Adjacencies
1 Select Manual Adjacencies from the path shown to display the screen as
in.Figure 10-33.
Figure 10-33: Manual Adjacencies

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Create Manual Adjacency

1 To create manual adjacencies, select Create from the Functions menu to
display the screen shown in.Figure 10-34.
Figure 10-34: Create Manual Adjacency - DCCr or DCCm Selected
Note: In the Create screen, if the port is type Q, then the Port ID is not displayed
(SNPA only). If the port type is DCCr or DCCm, then the SNPA will not be
displayed.
2 The overall parameters are as follows:
· Port Type: Q, DCCr or DCCm
· SNPA: 12 Hex characters
· Port ID: Core A Line East/West, Core B Line East/West Tribs 1 to 2 -

For Tributaries 1 to 2, you can also set the OH Bus 1, OH Bus 2 (Card
type dependent).
· Number of System ID Fields: 1 to 8
· In each System ID field: 2 to 16 hexadecimal characters (2 times the

System ID Length as defined in the Network Layer Configuration
screen Figure 10-22)
Note: On dual port STM-1 cards, the ports are designated Port 1 and Port 2
Note: The quad card has four ports, designated Ports 1-4.
3 Select OK to add the manual adjacency to the parent window. You are returned
to the parent screen where the selected manual adjacency is created.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
4 Select Apply in the Manual Adjacencies screen to apply any changes.
you that you will lose all changes unless you apply them first.
5 Select Close from the File menu to return to the Local Craft Terminal:
SMA1/4UC window.
Amend Manual Adjacency

1 To view and amend manual adjacencies, select Amend from the Functions
menu to display the Amend Manual Adjacency screen (Figure 10-35).
Figure 10-35: Amend Manual Adjacency
2 For details of the parameter settings, refer to 0
3 Select OK to add the amended manual adjacency to the parent window.
4 You are returned to the parent screen where the selected manual adjacency is
amended.
you that you will lose all changes unless you apply them first.
6 Select Close from the File menu and OK the warning message to return to the
Local Craft Terminal:SMA1/4UC window.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Delete Manual Adjacency

1 To delete manual adjacencies, select the required adjacency from the list in the
Manual Adjacencies screen shown in. Figure 10-33.
2 Select Delete from the Functions menu to display the screen.
3 To delete the selected manual adjacency, select Yes. You are returned to the
parent screen where the selected manual adjacency will have been deleted.
Note: When deleting a manual adjacency, all entries associated with it are
also deleted (all lines sharing the same Port ID).
5 Select Close from the File menu and OK the warning message to return to the
Performance Counts - Global

You can view the comms performance counts globally. They are displayed as shown in
Figure 10-36, which is a read-only screen.
If 1:N protection is in use, performance data is available only from the worker card. If a
protection switch occurs in this case, the performance data from the new worker card is
added to that for the old worker card and reported together.
Note: In the performance counts screen the abbreviation TPDU is a Transport

Protocol Data Unit, whilst NPDU is a Network Protocol Data Unit.
Performance Counts > Global
1 Select Global from the path shown to display the screen illustrated in.Figure
10-36.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Figure 10-36: Global Comms Performance Counts
2 Select Refresh to update parameters
SMA1/4UC window.
Performance Counts - Per DCC Interface

The comms performance counts can be viewed on a per-DCC interface basis. They are
displayed as shown in the example Figure 10-37: Comms Performance Counts Per
DCC Interface
Note: In the Per Interface Comms Performance Counts screen the abbreviation
LAPD is Link Access Protocol D-channel, whilst IS-IS is Network Layer
Intermediate System-Intermediates System routing.
Performance Counts > Per DCC Interface
1 Select Per DCC Interface from the path shown to display the screen illustrated
in.Figure 10-37.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Figure 10-37: Comms Performance Counts Per DCC Interface
2 Select Refresh to update parameters.
SMA1/4UC window.
Clear Comms Performance Counts - Per DCC Interface

The comms performance counts can be cleared on a per-DCC interface basis. They are
displayed as shown in .Figure 10-37
Note: In the Per Interface Comms Performance Counts screen the abbreviation
LAPD is Link Access Protocol D-channel, whilst IS-IS is Network Layer
Intermediate System-Intermediates System routing.
Path: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window > Configuration > Comms > Clear
Performance Counts > Per DCC Interface
1 Select Per DCC Interface from the path shown to display a screen similar to that
illustrated in.Figure 10-37.
2 Select the port as required.
3 Select OK to clear the counts for that port (answer YES to confirm the reset – a
new Question window opens) and return to the Local Craft Terminal:
SMA1/4UC window.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Message Based Persistency Thresholds

The message based persistence scheme uses a sliding window mechanism. If the
percentage of errors within the window exceeds the fault detection threshold, an alarm
is raised. If the percentage of errors falls below the fault clear threshold, the alarm is
cleared.
The Comms Message Based Persistency Thresholds screen (Figure 10-38) allows
you to amend the Comms Message Based Persistency Thresholds on a per alarm basis
for the comms alarm types shown (0-80% in 5% steps).
When required, the Network Planner supplies the alarm components. Under normal
conditions the screen contains defaults (On=10% and Off= 5%) from the
Comms/Controller at commissioning.
Message Based Persistency Thresholds
1 Select Message Based Persistency Thresholds from the path shown to display
the Comms Message Based Persistency Thresholds screen (Figure 10-38.)
Figure 10-38: Comms Message Based Persistency Thresholds
2 Set the values to those supplied by the Network Planner.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Time Based Persistency Thresholds

The time based persistence scheme uses a fixed time period of 1 second. If the number
of errors within this time period exceeds the fault detection threshold an alarm is raised.
When the number of errors falls below the fault clear threshold, the alarm is cleared.
The Comms Time Based Persistency Thresholds screen (Figure 10-39) allows you
to amend the SOH Parity Fail and LAPD Link Layer Queue Overflow (Tx) time based
persistency thresholds. Initially, the screen contains defaults from the Comms/Controller
at commissioning.
Comms Time Based Persistency
1 Select Comms Time Based Persistency from the path shown to display the
Comms Time Based Persistency Thresholds screen (Figure 10-39).
Figure 10-39: Comms Time Based Persistency Thresholds
2 The On/Off threshold range is 1-15 in one unit steps, the on default is 8, the off
default is 4.
4 Select Print to print parameters to a file or hard copy if required
Level 1 Routing Tables

The Level 1 Routing Table screen allows you to view Level 1 routing tables, save them
to file or print them.
The Level 1 Routing Table shows the state of routing, and also what is happening within
a particular IS-IS area.
Routing Table > Level 1
1 Select Level 1 from the path shown to display the screen in Figure 10-40.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Figure 10-40: Level 1 Routing Table
The Level 1 routing data consists of the following:
· Entry Type: Manual/IS-IS/Virtual/ES-IS
· System ID: 2-16 Hex characters
· Port: Q or DCC ID
· SNPA: Numeric 12 Hex characters or blank if port is DCC ID
· Metric: Numeric 4 decimal characters
· L2: True/False or blank
· Next Hop: (2-16 Hex character system ID) or blank.
To view any updated routing table details, select Refresh.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Level 2 Routing Tables

The Level 2 Routing Table screen allows you to view Level 2 routing tables, save them
to file or print them.
The Level 2 Routing Table shows the state of routing, and also what is happening
between the IS-IS areas.
Routing Table > Level 2
1 Select Level 2 from the path shown to display the screen as in Figure 10-41.
Figure 10-41: Level 2 Routing Tables
The Level 2 routing data consists of the following:
· Entry Type: Manual or IS-IS
· Area Prefix: 2 to 36 hexadecimal characters (1 to 18 bytes)
· Port: Q or DCC ID
· SNPA: Numeric 12 Hex characters or blank if port is DCC (Manual

Entry)
· Metric: Numeric 4 decimal characters
· Next Hop: (2-16 Hex character system ID) or blank.
2 To view any updated routing table details, select Refresh.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
CLNS Ping
This function allows you to test the connectivity of the Network Layer software between
NEs using the NSAP of the NE.
In normal operation this feature sends out an echo request PDU (Packet Data Unit) and
looks to receive an answer. On receiving an echo response the success or failure of this
command is displayed, together with details of the route (if Route Trace is invoked).
The Mode of Operation may be set to either Single or Multiple shot and Path Trace
may be set to On (single shot only) or Off.
Note: It is not possible to CLNS (Connection Less Mode Network Service) Ping at
Interim Routing NEs, or through an Interim Routing Domain as these NEs are
unable to route this particular type of packet.
Note: Ping is an abbreviation for the term Packet Internet Groper.
CLNS Ping
1 Select CLNS Ping from the path shown to display the CLNS Ping screen
in.Figure 10-42.
Figure 10-42: CLNS Ping

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
You can stop this function whilst a multiple shot is in progress by selecting Stop
in the CLNS Ping screen.
Note: After clicking Stop during a multiple shot, a delay of up to 120 seconds
can occur whilst the local NE polls the remote NEs (receive) awaiting a
response.
2 Set the input fields to those supplied by the ’Network Planners’.
The overall parameters are as follows (defaults in brackets):
· System ID: 2-16 Hex characters
· NSAP Selector: Numeric 2 Hex characters
· Area Address: 2 to 36 hexadecimal characters (2 to 18 bytes)
· Mode: Single Shot or Multiple Shot (Single Shot)
· Route Trace: On or Off (default is On with Single Shot)
Note: Route Trace is Off with Multiple Shot selected.
DCC Configuration - Working

Working Configuration is the configuration currently being used in the NE.
system within SMA1/4UC networks, in particular for the Data Communication Channel
(DCC) function and configuration.
WARNING!
EXTREME CARE IS REQUIRED WHEN SETTING THE WORKING DCC
CONFIGURATIONS. MAKE NO ATTEMPT TO CHANGE FROM THE DEFAULT
SETTINGS WITHOUT GOOD REASON AND A THOROUGH UNDERSTANDING OF
THE IMPLICATIONS. AN ERROR IN SETTING UP COULD RESULT IN A LOSS OF
COMMUNICATION.
Use this function to view the current configuration and, subject to the above
considerations, change it.
Note: When you logically add a card, it adopts the default DCC and LAPD
configuration parameters. You can then modify these values as required.
Path: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window > Configuration > Comms > DCC
Configuration > Working
1 Select Working from the path shown to display the screen in Figure 10-43. The
screen contains a list of ports.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Figure 10-43: Working DCC Configuration
Amending the Working DCC Configuration

1 Select the port that you want to work with from the list.
2 Select Amend in the Working DCC Configuration screen to display the screen
Figure 10-44: Amend Working DCC Configuration
3 Set the input fields as required.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Note: If Comms is uncommissioned, State, Coding and Inter-Frame Fill can

be set.
The parameter settings are as follows (defaults in brackets):
· State: Inhibit or Do Not Inhibit (Do Not Inhibit)
· Coding: NRZ or NRZI (NRZ)
· Inter-frame Fill: Flags or All Ones (Flags)
Note: If an SMA1/4UC tributary is connected to an SLA tributary, then select

NRZ coding. However, If the tributary is connected to Line East or
West of the SLA, then select NRZI coding.
4 Select OK in the Amend DCC Configuration screen and then Apply in the
parent Working DCC Configuration screen to add the amended DCC
configuration.
Note: You must Apply any changes to save them. If you make changes and
select Cancel before you select Apply, a Warning message informs
you that the changes will be lost.
5 Select Cancel and OK the warning message to return to the Local Craft
Terminal:SMA1/4UC window.
DCC Configuration - Default

system within SMA1/4UC networks, in particular for the DCC function and configuration.
Use this function to view and amend the current default DCC Configuration settings.
CAUTION!
EXTREME CARE IS REQUIRED WHEN SETTING THE WORKING DCC
CONFIGURATIONS. MAKE NO ATTEMPT TO CHANGE THE SETTINGS WITHOUT
GOOD REASON AND A THOROUGH UNDERSTANDING OF THE IMPLICATIONS.
AN ERROR IN SETTING UP COULD RESULT IN A LOSS OF COMMUNICATION.
Path: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window > Configuration > Comms > DCC
Configuration > Default
1 Select Default from the path shown to display the screen in Figure 10-45. The

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Figure 10-45: Default DCC Configuration
Amending the Default DCC Configuration

2 Select Amend in the Default DCC Configuration screen to display the screen
Figure 10-46: Amend Default DCC Configuration

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
· State: Inhibit or Do Not Inhibit (Do Not Inhibit)
· Coding: NRZ or NRZI (NRZ)
· Inter-frame Fill: Flags or All Ones (Flags)
3 Select OK in the Amend DCC Configuration screen and then Apply in the
parent Default DCC Configuration screen to add the amended DCC
configuration.
4 Select Cancel and OK the warning message to return to the Local Craft
Terminal:SMA1/4UC window.
LAPD Configuration - Working

Working Configuration is the configuration currently being used in the NE.
system within SMA1/4UC networks, in particular for the Link Access Procedure for the
D-channel (LAPD) function and configuration.
WARNING!
EXTREME CARE IS REQUIRED WHEN SETTING THE WORKING LAPD
CONFIGURATION. MAKE NO ATTEMPT TO CHANGE FROM THE DEFAULT
SETTINGS WITHOUT GOOD REASON AND A THOROUGH UNDERSTANDING OF
THE IMPLICATIONS. AN ERROR IN SETTING UP COULD RESULT IN A LOSS OF
COMMUNICATION.
Use this function to view the current configuration and, subject to the above warning,
change it.
LAPD Configuration > Working
1 Select Working from the path shown to display the screen in Figure 10-47. The
Figure 10-47: Working LAPD Configuration

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Amending the Working LAPD Configuration

2 Select Amend from the LAPD Configuration screen to display the screen
shown in.Figure 10-48.
Figure 10-48: Amend Working LAPD Configuration
3 Set the input fields as required.
· Mode: Network or User (Network, Line West All)
· Window Size: 0-255 (7)
· Max Packet Size: 512-1534 (1512).
Note: If the Max packet size is set to a figure greater than 1534 this may lead
to failure.
4 Select OK in the Amend LAPD DCC screen and then Apply in the parent
window to effect the modified DCC configuration.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
LAPD Configuration - Default

system within SMA1/4UC networks, in particular for the default LAPD function and
configuration.
Use this function to view and amend the current default LAPD configuration.
Default LAPD Configuration
1 Select Default LAPD Configuration from the path shown to display the screen as
in Figure 10-49.The screen contains a list of ports.
Figure 10-49: Default LAPD Configuration

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Amending the Default LAPD Configuration

2 Select Amend from the Default LAPD Configuration screen to display the
screen shown in Figure 10-50
Figure 10-50: Amend Default LAPD Configuration
3 The parameter settings are as follows (defaults in brackets):
· Mode: Network or User (Network, Line West All)
· Window Size: 0-255 (7)
· Max Packet Size: 512-1534 (1512)
Note: If the Max packet size is set to a figure greater than 1534 this may lead
to failure.
4 Select OK in the Amend LAPD DCCm Configuration screen and then Apply
in the parent Default LAPD Configuration window to effect the modified LAPD
configuration.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
SETG Synchronisation Parameters

The Comms/Controller Card initially supplies the synchronisation default parameters
during the commissioning procedure (free run from an internal oscillator situated on the
Switch Card). However, you can display and amend the parameters later.
Before starting any procedure associated with synchronisation, you must be thoroughly
conversant with the information provided in the related SMA1/4UC product manual.
CAUTION!
THE SSMB MODE DEFAULT CONDITION, WHICH IS INCLUDED IN THIS SCREEN,
IS ENABLED. DO NOT DISABLE IT WITHOUT CONFIRMATION FROM THE
NETWORK CONTROLLER. IF SSMB MODE IS INADVERTENTLY DISABLED,
TIMING LOOPS MAY APPEAR THROUGHOUT THE NETWORK.
Path: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window > Configuration > Sync > SETG
Sync Mode
1 Select SETG Sync Mode from the path shown to access the Sync Mode
screen. The screen presents data relating to the current synchronisation mode,
see. Figure 10-51.
Figure 10-51: Sync Mode
2 The ranges available for the fields are:
· Synchronisation Mode: Freerunning (default), Single SETG
· Sync Switch Mode: Revertive, Non-Revertive
· WTR Period: 0 to 30 minutes in 0.5 minute steps.
Note: When Revertive Sync Switch is invoked, set a Wait to Restore (WTR)
period of at least 1 minute to avoid chattering.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
· Timing Marker Operation: Enabled/Disabled
· Fast External Output: Enabled/Disabled
· Default Transmit SSMB: 0000 - 1111
· 2Mbit/s De-sync Bandwidth: Normal (standard) or Narrow (non-

standard)
· SASE Mode: options are listed in SASE Mode Options.
Table 10-1: SASE Mode Options
ESM (Input 1&2) Enabled
ESM (Input 2) Enabled
ESM (Input 1) Enabled
SASE Mode Enabled
Disabled
Note: Only enable this option once the equipment has been configured for
SASE timing. To provide SASE timing the external output priority table
will have to be operator configured. For details of this feature, see
Synchronisation in the relevant associated product manual.
Note: SSMB Quality Level: for each binary value in the range 0000 to 1110
you can set the quality level to a value in the range 1 to 16.
Single Synchronisation Timing Generation (SETG) Mode

Synchronisation default parameters are initially supplied by the Core A card during the
commissioning procedure (free run from an internal oscillator situated on the
Core/Switch). These parameters can be displayed and amended as required.
Before starting any procedure associated with synchronisation, you must be thoroughly
conversant with the detailed synchronisation information provided in the related
SMA1/4UC product manual.
This procedure describes the allocation of synchronisation sources to synchronisation

destinations with the desired priorities. Priority 1 is the highest and Priority 6 is the
lowest. For example, if a synchronisation source with Priority 1 fails, then the
synchronisation source with the next priority, Priority 2, is selected to supply the
appropriate destination and so on.
· On SMA1/4UC
- Destination Equip can be supplied by any of 5 sources (Priorities 1-5)
- Destination Ext can be supplied by any of 6 sources (Priorities 1-6)

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
The sources in each case display on the left of the screen under Source, the
destinations display to the right of the source. The sources being West A, West B, East
A, East B, Ext/tributary, SASE Bus and Equip Clock. Destinations are Equip and Ext.
- The SMA1/4UC will accept a sync source without checking its quality. A
poor quality clock may cause alarms to be generated.
- In the LCT Sync screens, a failed tributary, Ext 1 or Ext 2 configured sync
source is displayed in Single SETG screens as being Not Selected.
- In the case of tributary port selection, tributary port should be selected

(tributary port origin screen) before setting the tributary priority in the
Ext/tributary Origin screen.
Path: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window > Configuration > Sync > Single
SETG
1 Select Single SETG from the path shown to display the Single SETG screen.
The screen presents data relating to the sources currently in use for the timing
sinks and has various amendable fields for each sink (destination) see Figure
10-52 for details.
Figure 10-52: Single SETG Mode
2 In each Equip Destination field, the options are: ~~ (not used), 1; 2; 3. In each
Ext Destination field the options are: ~~ (not used), 1; 2; 3; 4.
In the Minimum Quality field the options are 1-16.
Note: The entries indicate the priority allocated to that source, None indicates
not used, and 1 to 6 the priority in descending order.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
· If a priority is to be set against the Equipment Clock source, then no

other source should be set for Ext. This provides an external output
with a clock that tracks the system clock.
· If line or SASE bus sources are selected in the priority table the
equipment will usually be used in SASE Timing Mode (see SETG
Synchronisation Parameters and the associated product manual). In
this case, leave the Equipment Clock field blank (no entry in the given
field).
3 The Source SSMB fields show the Rx Code and the Cfg code and Rx/Cfg
status. The codes are configurable in the range 0000 to 1111; the status can be
Rx or Cfg.
Note: Whenever Single SETG Mode is selected, then the Received Loop
Timing Indication is not presented.
External/Tributary Timing Source

The Core A card Comms/Controller during the commissioning procedure initially
supplies synchronisation default parameters. You can display and amend the
parameters as required.
Before starting any procedure associated with synchronisation you must be thoroughly
conversant with the information provided in the related SMA1/4UC product manual.
The tributary ports selected as Ext/tributary and SASE bus sources can also be
configured and the SSMB value assigned to PDH tributary ports and external ports. If
SSMB Mode is disabled, then the configured SSMB codes will be ignored.
You can allocate priorities to three possible synchronisation sources to define the order
in which they are automatically selected for use. The sources are External 1, External 2,
and Tributary.
Note: In the LCT Sync screens, a failed tributary, Ext 1 or Ext 2 configured sync
source is displayed in Single SETG screens as being Not Selected.
Path: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window > Configuration > Sync >
Ext/tributary Source
1 Select Ext/tributary Source from the path shown to display the

External/tributary Sync screen in.Figure 10-53. The screen shows data
relating to the state of the external and tributary synchronisation sources, and
the current priority allocated to them.
Note: When configuring any new sync sources, allow 20 seconds for alarms
to clear. This is due to the length of time taken for the frequency-
checking algorithm to operate.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Figure 10-53: External Trib Sync Origin
2 In the Ext/tributary Sync - Source pane, change the desired field or fields as
required. In each field, the options are: ~~ (not used), 1; 2; or 3.
Note: The entries indicate the priority allocated to that source, ~~ (not used),
and 1 to 3 the priority in descending order.
Note: If you select a Trib Sync source, you must set the Source SSMB to
Config as the tributary cannot extract the SSM from the incoming
signal and as such Rx is not valid.
Note: If you wish to select a tributary port, first select a Card and Port (from
the Tributary Sync Source pane) before setting the Tributary Priority in
the Ext/tributary Sync - Source pane. When you set the Tributary
Priority, TB1 (Timing Bus 1) is always indicated as the source in use,
no matter which tributary is being used as the source.
Note: An OK indication for an external timing input informs you that the level
of the input signal is within limits. It does not indicate frequency
accuracy.
Note: Tributary card options depend upon the shelf type and the cards
configured in the tributary slots.
Note: In the SMA1/4UC there are only 2 generic trib cards.
The Source SSMB fields show the Rx Code and the Cfg code and Rx/Cfg
status. The codes are configurable in the range 0000 to 1111; the status can be
Rx or Cfg.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
3 In the Tributary Sync Source pane, the following settings are available
(depending on the shelf variant):
· Card: None, Tributary 1 to Tributary 4, Tributary 8 and Core A

Tributary.
· Port None, Port 1 to Port 4/16/32 (for STM-1 tributary card, set this to
Port 1, for Dual STM-1, set it to Port 1-2 and for Quad STM-1, set it to
Port 1-4).
4 In the External Configuration pane, the following settings are available:
· Output Off State: 0 Volts, DC offset and High Impedance
· Output Clk Freq: 2.048MHz, 1.544MHz, 2.048Hz Framed, 2.048 Hz

Framed with SSMB
· Input Clk Freq and Type:
2M clock (G703.10)
2M AIS data (G703.6)
1.5M clock (G703.10)
1.5M AIS data (G703.6)
2M G703 framed
2M G703 framed with SSMB
· External I/P SSMB Positions in TS0: 4, 5. 6, 7 or 8 (Default 8)
· External O/P SSMB Positions in TS0: 4, 5. 6, 7 or 8 (Default 8)
The external I/P and O/P SSMB positions in TS0 fields can be changed between
4 and 8 (that is representing bits 4-8 in TS0) to suit actual customer
requirements.
Note: If the external input frequency and type are to be changed, then it is
important to disable selection of the external input whilst making these
changes. Inadvertently setting the input frequency and type incorrectly
will cause the external outputs to become squelched.
Should squelching occur and not recover, then you will have to
temporarily deselect the external inputs as the source of timing either
by:
- Configuring an alternative or a null source in the priority table

- Physically disconnecting the external inputs.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Figure 10-54: External Trib Sync Origin
5 In the SASE Bus Source pane you can set the Card and Port for all configured
STM-n tributary cards and CellSpan 155 cards.
Diagnostic Reset
Diagnostic Reset allows the configuration data of selected cards/units (which must be
logically configured in the sub-rack) to be automatically reset after a given time period.
You can also manually reset any operator-set parameters for loopbacks, PRBS injection
and error injection. You can do this independently of the automatic reset by disabling
the automatic reset and applying any manual resets.
Note: The RESET command may affect traffic, therefore any request must be
confirmed.
Path: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window > Configuration > Diagnostic
Reset
1 Select Diagnostic Reset from the path shown to display the Diagnostic Reset
screen.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Figure 10-55: Diagnostic Reset:
2 You can disable the diagnostic reset, or enable it by setting the operating time to
between five and 60 minutes in 5-minute intervals. You can also set the manual
reset options for Loopback, PRBS Injection and Error Injection.
3 Select Apply to send the reset instruction to the Core A card card.
Note: The Automatic Reset time will apply to NEW loopbacks and injections.
Manual Reset will remove the present loopbacks and injections
immediately.
AIS Injection
An All-Ones (AIS) signal can be injected (to enable fault finding) on the multiplexer.
Before you can do this, you must first enable the feature. Use this function to globally
enable or disable the overall AIS injection facility.
Note: Disable this feature when applying PRBS to a 34/45Mbit/s tributary card (See
PRBS Injection on page 216. for further details).
Note: The Injection of AIS may affect traffic, therefore any request must be confirmed.
The optional injection of AIS is used in the forward direction when tributary
loopbacks are applied, and in the backwards direction when PRBS is injected.
Note: When 34M tributary PRBS injection is enabled, global AIS must be inserted in
tributary PDH output. The 34M ASIC PRBS detector detects the injected AIS
signal instead of the PRBS received from the switch, thus successful PRBS
detection is not possible unless global AIS is disabled.
For further details on the various types of loopback that may be applied to an
SMA1/4UC, see the relevant section (Data Loopbacks) in the Maintenance Manual.
Path: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window > Configuration > AIS Injection
1 Select AIS Injection from the path shown to display the AIS Injection screen.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Figure 10-56: AIS Injection
2 Select Enabled or Disabled as appropriate and select Apply.
3 Select Cancel in the AIS Injection screen to return to the Local Craft
SOH Byte Bypass

Specific Section OverHead (SOH) Byte bypass can be enabled (when an auxiliary card
is not fitted in the slot) or disabled (when an auxiliary card is fitted).
The SOH Bytes are transmitted in the STM-N signal carried via the SMA1/4UC and are
designated E1, E2. F1 and Row 7 Column 8, Row 8 Column 8, etc. to Row 9 Column 9
respectively. All of these appear on a single screen and each group of bytes can be
bypassed as required in the given fields. With bypass enabled, the relevant byte is
passed transparently between STM-N Line East and West.
Path: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window > Configuration > SOH Byte
Bypass
1 Select SOH Byte Bypass from the path shown to display the SOH Byte Bypass
screen (see Figure 10-57). This screen shows the SOH byte states in the three
fields.
Figure 10-57: SOH Byte Bypass
2 Change the Enabled/Disabled states as required.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Auxiliary Overhead Byte

This section identifies the termination point of each of the SOH and POH bytes/bits. If
these bytes are not generated on the transmitting card, it identifies the source of these
bytes for the card. Any path configured for unidirectional operation has the REI and RDI
in the respective overhead byte set to 0 at the termination source.
Path: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window > Configuration > Auxiliary
Overhead Byte
1 Select Auxiliary Overhead Byte from the path shown to display the Auxiliary
Overhead Byte Configuration screen. This screen shows the Auxiliary
Overhead Byte Configuration for both Auxiliary Port 1 West and Auxiliary Port 2
East, as indicated by the selectable tabs on this screen.
Figure 10-58: Auxiliary Overhead Byte
2 Select the Auxiliary Switch using the Auxiliary Switch box.
· Fixed to Line A
· Fixed to Line B
· Follow Inter card MSP
3 Select the Auxiliary Source using the Auxiliary Source box. In the SMA1/4UC
we have that:
· Aux port 1 = Line West
· Aux port2 = Line East
4 Select the relevant OH Byte to be used for the Auxiliary Channel, from the
tabulated buttons on the right hand side of the screen.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Interworking Criterion
Interworking Criterion allows for backwards compatibility between product ranges,
enabling you to configure the signal transmitted in all unused VC-n channels.
You can globally configure the Interworking Criterion. This feature configures the
Criterion to be one of the following:
· All networks (including SMA1.1)
· All networks (excluding SMA1.1 – All 0s)
· All networks (excluding SMA1.1 –All 1s )
Note: Interworking Criterion is required for interworking between the 1.1 and 1.2
product ranges. It is essential that it is set up correctly so that the signal label
processing function will detect any unequipped signal label mismatches. If it is
not set correctly, then the processing function will not detect unequipped signal
label mismatches.
Path: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window > Configuration > Interworking
Criterion
1 Select Interworking Criterion from the path shown to access the Interworking
Criterion screen, which shows the current criterion setting.
Figure 10-59: Interworking Criterion
Note: Networks including SMA1/4UC 1.1 - Selecting this will cause the TU
pointer of all unequipped channels to be set to 0000H.
Note: Networks excluding SMA1/4UC 1.1 All 1s - Selecting this will cause the
unequipped VC signal to be transmitted in all unused VC-n timeslots.
All bits/bytes that are not defined in all unequipped VCs will be set to 1.
Note: Networks excluding SMA1/4UC 1.1 All 0s -- Selecting this will cause
the unequipped VC signal to be transmitted in all unused VC-n
timeslots. All bits/bytes that are not defined in all unequipped VCs will
be set to 0.
2 Amend the setting as required and select Apply to send the data to the
3 Select OK to return to the Interworking Criterion screen.
4 Make sure the new information is displayed and conforms to the changes you
made. Select Cancel to exit the Interworking Criterion screen and return to
the Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Date and Time

The equipment for time stamping uses the SMA1/4UC local time (24-hour real time
clock) facility. It consists of the date in Day, Month and Year format (for example 14, 03,
2003) together with the time in hours and minutes (for example, 13, 06). You can
display and change the current date and time as required.
Path: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window > Configuration > Date and Time
1 Select Date and Time from the path shown to display the Date and Time
screen. Depending on previous operations, the current display could be either
the default values (Day 1, Month January, Year 1990, 0 hours and 0 minutes) or
previously specified values.
Figure 10-60: Date and Time
Note: Seconds are not configurable.
2 Change the date and time fields as required.
4 Make sure that the new time and date displayed conform to the changes. Select
Cancel to exit the Set Date and Time screen and return to the Local Craft
Note: An alarm is raised (Priority 1) on the LCT if the real time clock has not
been set since the controller card was powered up. It will only be
cleared when a new time and date are set.
Change Password - LCT User

This function is not available through the LCTS running under ServiceOn Optical
Element Manager. Further, this function is only available to system or casual users,
admin users have access to the functions in LCT User Admin. Use this function to
change your current LCT password for the SMA1/4UC.
The selected password should contain a minimum of eight and a maximum of fifteen
ASCII printable characters (a ’space‘ is not a valid character).
For security reasons, the new password is not echoed in the field as it is entered, but is
indicated by a series of stars (********).
The password is only accepted once it has been verified by re-typing the new password
and the Comms/Controller Card has validated it. Then the new password replaces the
existing password.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Path: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window > Configuration > Change
Password
1 Select Change Password from the path shown to access the Change
Password screen.
Figure 10-61: Change Password
The screen contains three fields:
· Old Password
· New Password
· Verify New Password.
When verifying the new password, it must exactly match your entry in the New
Password field.
2 When you are happy with the settings, select OK to send the data to the
Note: If the password is accepted, you can continue using the LCT. You need
to enter the new password to allow access when you subsequently log
back in.
3 Select Cancel in the Change Password screen to return to the Local Craft
LCT User Admin

Element Manager. Further, this function is only available to Admin users.
This function calls up the Local Craft Terminal - Users window, which allows you to:
· Add a user
· Change the password for the selected user
· Delete the selected user
· Set the EM password
· Set the security settings

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Figure 10-62: LCT User Admin
Add User
Use this to add a new casual or system user to the LCT. There can be up to 10 LCT
users, including all ADMIN users.
Path: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window > Configuration > LCT User Admin
> Function > Add User
1 Select Add User from the path shown to access the Add User screen.
Figure 10-63: Add LCT User
The screen contains four fields:
· User name - up to fifteen characters but no spaces; if you wish to

separate first and second names, use an underscore or a dash
· User Password - eight to fifteen characters - for security reasons, the

new password is not echoed in the field as it is entered, but is indicated
by a series of stars (********)

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
· Verify Password - when verifying the new password, it must exactly

match your entry in the User Password field
· User class (system or casual).
2 Select Apply to send the data to the Comms/ Controller Card.
Change LCT User Password

Use this to change the selected user's current LCT password, which must consist of,
between eight to fifteen characters.
Path: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window > Configuration > LCT User Admin
> Function > Change User Password
1 Select the user whose password you want to change from the list in the Local
Craft Terminal - Users window, then select Change User Password from the
path shown.
The screen contains three fields:
· Old Password
· New Password
· Verify New Password.
When verifying the new password, it must exactly match your entry in the New
Password field.
2 Select OK to send the data to the Comms/ Controller Card.
Note: If the password is accepted and the user is currently logged on, they
can continue using the application. The user must enter the new
password to allow access when subsequently logging back in.
3 Select Cancel in the Change Password screen to return to the Local Craft
Delete User
This function allows an Administration operator to delete the currently selected casual
or system user from the list. As only one user can be logged onto the LCT at a time,
there is no risk of deleting a user who is currently logged in.
Path: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window > Configuration > User
Administration > Function > Delete User
1 Select User Administration from the path shown to display the Local Craft
Terminal Users screen.
2 Select the user to be deleted, and then select Delete User from the path shown
to access the Delete User confirmation box.
3 Select Yes. This sends the data to the SMA1/4UC Comms/Controller Card.
4 The selected user is deleted from the Local Craft Terminal Users screen.
Select File and Close to return to the Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC
window.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Set EM Password
This allows you to set the EM password back to the system default setting, which is
‘EMACCESS’. This is useful where the EM user has forgotten their password - you can
set it back to the default setting and they can log in again and change their password as
required.
Administration > Local Craft Terminal Users screen > Function > Set EM
Password
2 Select Set EM Password from the path shown to access the Set EM Password
confirmation box.
3 Select Yes. This sends the data to the SMA1/4UC Comms/Controller Card.
4 From the Local Craft Terminal Users screen, select File and Close to return to
the Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Security Settings
This allows you to set the LCT-wide security settings. These dictate that if a user enters
their user name or password incorrectly, whether they should be locked out of the
system, and if so for how long.
Administration > Function > Security Settings
2 Select Security Settings from the path shown to display the LCT Security
Settings screen.
Figure 10-64: LCT Security Settings
· Maximum Number of Failed Logins: You can set this to Infinite or to

between 1 to 50. If the user fails to log in correctly (for example by
mistyping the password) this number of times, they will be locked out of
the system for the time period specified below.
· Lockout Period: Disabled or 10, 15, 20 or 30 minutes.
3 Select Apply to send the data to the SMA1/4UC Comms/Controller Card.

4 Select File and Close to return to the Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC
window.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Chapter 11:
Fault Management Menu
Figure 11-1: Fault Management Menu
Note: The menu contents may vary depending on the equipment and alarm schemes
in use.
11.1 Alarm Event Criteria

Alarm events are not automatically reported to the LCT, they must be requested as
required. Two separate indications are provided to inform you at the LCT when they
were raised.
· An ‘Alarms Exist’ flag on the status line informs you when alarms exist on the
NE. This flag will display from when the first alarm appears until the last alarm
is cleared.
· Another flag on the status line informs you that one or more alarms have
changed state since a specific operator action was last performed. This
specific operator action involves clearing the changed state indication
illustrated by the flag featured on the screen. If you do not respond to the
changed state transition, then the flag is removed for 1 second before being
restored for each subsequent transition. An audible warning is also given for
each change of status. You can disable the audible alarm.
Raising Alarm Events is automatically reported to the EM depending on the prevailing

state of the inhibit attribute for the relevant fault type, the enable/disable state of alarm
event reporting and presence of the EM. Alarm event records are generated for each
event, depending on the previously explained criteria. The expected behaviour is
outlined in Raising Alarm Events below:
Table 11-1: Raising Alarm Events
Alarm Event Report To

Event Inhibit EM Present
Reporting EM
False Yes Enabled Yes

False Yes Disabled No
Alarm Raise
False No X No
True X X No

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Note: X= Does Not Matter
Clearing Alarm Events is automatically reported to the EM, depending on the presence
of the EM and whether the corresponding raising alarm/event was reported to the EM.
The expected behaviour is outlined in Clearing Alarm Events below:
Table 11-2: Clearing Alarm Events
Event Raise Reported to EM EM Present Report To EM
Yes Yes Yes

Alarm Clear
No X No
Note: X= Does Not Matter.
Note: Clearing Alarm Events is always reported when the corresponding Raising
Alarm Event is reported, irrespective of the inhibit state of the relevant fault type
at the time of clearing and the enable/disable state of the alarm event reporting.
For each clearing alarm event, an event record is created and placed in the
Historical Alarm Event Log.
11.2 Status Event Criteria

Status events are not automatically reported to the LCT, you must request them as
required. These use a single indicator to inform you if either a resource or EM
reconfiguration has taken place since a specific operator action was last performed.
This specific operator action involves clearing the status-changed indication shown by
an icon/flag featured on the screen.
If you do not respond to the changed state transition, then the icon/flag is removed for 1
second before being restored for each subsequent transition. An audible warning is also
given for each change of status. You can disable this audible alarm.
Status Events are autonomously reported to the EM, but depend on the:
· Prevailing state of the inhibit attribute for the relevant state change (resource
or management),
· Enable/disable state of status event reporting and
· Presence of the EM.
Status event records are generated for each event and are placed in either the current
status event or historical status event log, depending on the previously explained
criteria. The expected behaviour is outlined in Table 11-3: Status Event Criteria below:

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Table 11-3: Status Event Criteria
Mgmt
Resource Status Event EM Destination Report To
Event Event
Event Inhibit Reporting Present Log EM
Inhibit
EM Configuration X X X N/A Historical No
False X Enabled Yes Historical Yes

False X Enabled No Current No
LCT Configuration
False X Disabled No Current No
True X X X Historical No
X False Enabled Yes Historical Yes

Autonomous X False Enabled No Current No
Configuration X False Disabled No Current No
X True X X Historical No
Note: X= Does Not Matter.
Status events are recognised whenever changes are made to the configuration of a NE.
They can occur under the following circumstances:
· Reconfiguration by the EM or the LCT, which can be regarded as a

Management Event, or
· Reconfiguration autonomously by the NE itself, which can be regarded as a

Resource Event.
11.2.1 Status Events-Resource

The NE generates these to inform you that it has autonomously altered its own
configuration in response to a detected condition as follows:
· Synch Re-selection
· 1+1 MSP Protection
· Core Card Protection
· HO Path Protection
· LO Path Protection
· 1:N Tributary Card Protection
· Tributary Port Protection
· Diagnostic Reset After Timeout.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
11.2.2 Status Events-Management

The NE detects these when configuration commands are received from the Network
Management Interfaces. They can be considered as the set commands or individual
tasks that are covered in this manual, for example Set NE Date and Time, Amend Shelf
Configuration Details or Alarm Configuration, etc.
11.2.3 Current Status Events Log

The current Status Event Log is a buffer store where status event changes are stored
pending notification of the changes to the EM. Once the EM is informed of the status
change, then the entry is cleared from the Current Log and placed in the Historic Event
Log.
NE Alarm Event Configuration

Event Handling covers a variety of tasks, which are mainly associated with the
management of the configurable attributes of the NE Alarm Events. These alarm events
are used to alert you to a change occurring in the set of monitor states for a given NE.
This may be due to the occurrence or subsidence of a given fault condition. Faults are
then categorised into types by the detected condition.
Due to the modular construction of a NE, a single fault condition is detected at multiple
points within it. These multiple point alarm events can be altered globally from the NE
Alarm Event Type Configuration screen (see Figure 11-2). Each fault type therefore
has a unique identity indicating its source.
Path: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window > Fault Management > NE Alarm
Event Config
1 Select NE Alarm Event Config from the path shown to display the NE Alarm
Event Config screen.
The whole range of alarm types can be found on this screen. A full list of these
alarms (in alphabetical order) and the procedures required to clear the condition
or fault find on the equipment may be found in the associated Maintenance
Manual.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Figure 11-2: NE Alarm Event Type Configuration
2 Select the required Alarm Event Type from the scrolling list.
3 In the Set Alarm Event Type Configuration fields, select the settings required:
· Alarm Event Class: Communications, Quality of Service, Processing

Error, Equipment or Environmental Alarm
Note: The contents of the Local Indication area depend on the alarm scheme
in operation.
· Inhibit State: Inhibited or Not Inhibited
· Disable State: Disabled or Not Disabled

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
User Input Alarms

This facility allows the user to name their own alarms by feeding in signals through the
SMA1/UC’s ancillary unit. For example they may wish to monitor the state of an external
power supply.
Figure 11-3: User Input Alarms

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
All Disabled Alarms

In the Alarm Configuration screen you can disable selected alarms. Use this All
Disabled Alarms function to view and print a list of these alarms.
Note: To change these alarm states, see NE Alarm Event Configuration.
Path: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window > Fault Management > All
Disabled Alarms
1 Select All Disabled Alarms from the path shown to display the Disabled Alarms
screen showing a list of all currently disabled alarms.
Figure 11-4: All Disabled Alarms

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
All Inhibited Alarms

In the Alarm Configuration screen you can inhibit selected alarms. Use this All
Inhibited Alarms function to view and print a list of these alarms.
Note: To change these alarm states, see NE Alarm Event Configuration.
Path: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window > Fault Management > All
Inhibited Alarms
1 Select All Inhibited Alarms from the path shown to display the Inhibited Alarms
screen that shows a list of all currently Inhibited alarms.
Figure 11-5: Inhibited Alarms
Alarm Persistence
This allows you to set a persistence period that an alarm’s raising or clearing must
persist for before the alarm is flagged as being raised or cleared. If it does not persist
for this period, the alarm is flagged as intermittent.
Alarm Persistency can be applied to the fault types illustrated Figure 11-6, the Alarm
Persistence screen).
Due to the modular construction of a NE, a single persistence can be applied to multiple
points within the NE. These multiple point conditions can be changed globally for the
NE in the Alarm Persistence screen.
Each fault type's persistency value is loaded to a counter. When a transition occurs the
counter will decrement. If a further transition occurs before the expiry of the current
timer, then the timer is re-loaded with the selected persistency value and the detector
output will be seen as being intermittent. On expiry of the timer the detector output can
be either cleared or raised as appropriate.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Figure 11-6: Alarm Persistence Configuration
Path: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window > Fault Management > Fault
Detectors > Alarm Persistence
1 Select Alarm Persistence from the path shown to display the Alarm
Persistence screen that shows the current status of the facility.
2 Set the Alarm Persistence for each alarm type to the required value:
Off, 1, 3, 10 or 30 seconds as appropriate.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Fault Action
Fault actions are generally carried out as a direct result of the detection of a fault
condition. Selectable fault actions can be disabled on certain fault types as illustrated in
Figure 11-7. Such disabling does not interfere with the fault event processing function.
For fault types where fault actions are defined but are not configurable, this information
display as read only.
The fault actions you can enable or disable are:
· The insertion of all ones signal (AIS) into a downstream traffic path
· The insertion of Remote Defect Indication (RDI) into the return path
· Data Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)
· Remote Alarm Indication (RAI).
Note: In the Fault Action screen (Figure 11-7) either:
HO Path Signal Label Mismatch and HO Path Signal Label

Unequipped, or
LO Path Signal Label Mismatch and LO Path Signal Label Unequipped
should be treated as pairs. For example if HO Path Signal Label

Mismatch is set to AIS, then the corresponding HO Path Signal Label
Unequipped should also be set the same (AIS). Some options may be
unavailable for configuration.
Note: Section Trace Mismatch RDI and AIS, should also be treated as pairs.
For example both should be set to either Enabled (a) or Disabled
(blank) as necessary.
Detectors > Fault Action
1 Select Fault Action from the path shown to display the Fault Action screen.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Figure 11-7: Fault Action Disable
2 Change the Fault Action states as appropriate.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Event Detection Thresholds

Use this function to set Error Detection Thresholds for various fault types.
Detectors > Event Detection Thresholds
1 Select Event Detection Thresholds from the path shown to display the Event
Detection Thresholds screen, which shows the current threshold settings.
Figure 11-8: Event Detection Thresholds
2 Select the required field and set the error detection threshold to the required
values. The values shown in Table 11-4 show the ranges available.
Table 11-4: Event Detection Threshold Ranges
Fault Type On Threshold Off Threshold
STM-N Loss Of Frame 8, 16, or 24 8, 16, or 24
AU Loss Of Pointer 8 to 10 3 (not configurable)
TU Loss Of Pointer 8 to 10 3 (not configurable)
Loss Of TU Multiframe 2-10 2-10
Section Trace Mismatch 2-10 2-10
HO Path Trace Mismatch 2-10 2-10
LO Path Trace Mismatch 2-10 2-10
HO Path Signal Label

2-10 2-10
Mismatch
LO Path Signal Label

2-10 2-10
Mismatch

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Diagnostic Alarm Persistency

Diagnostic Alarm Persistency is set globally (on a per NE basis) and applies to all
diagnostic type alarms. See Topic 6 more details on the alarms affected.
'Alarm flood' limits are incorporated into the SMA1/4UC. This option is used to limit the
Historic Logs being “flooded” with alarms. The following alarms have fixed 30-second
persistency:
· 9.72MHz PLL Out-Of-Limits
· System PLL Out-Of-Limits
· External Out PLL Out-Of-Limits
· Rx Au Rejustifier Fail
· STM-n Rx PLL OOL
Detectors > Diagnostic Alarm Persistency
1 Select Diagnostic Alarm Persistency from the path shown to display the
Diagnostic Alarm Persistency screen showing the currently set persistency
duration.
Figure 11-9: Diagnostic Alarm Persistency
2 Configure the persistency duration in the Persistency field box to the required
value:
Off, 30, 60, 90 or 120 seconds as appropriate.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Alarm Audible Warning

Element Manager.
Alarm Audible Warning is the automatic audible warning of alarms reported at the LCT.
The facility can be either enabled or disabled.
Path: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window > Fault Management > Event
Reporting > Alarm Audible Warning
1 Select Alarm Audible Warning from the path shown to display the Alarm
Audible Warning screen, which shows the current status.
2 Adjust the Alarm Audible Warning to the required setting (Enabled or

Disabled).
Status Audible Warning

Element Manager.
Status Audible Warning is the automatic audible warning of Status Events reported at
the LCT. The facility can be either enabled or disabled.
Reporting > Status Audible Warning
1 Select Status Audible Warning from the path shown to display the Status
Audible Warning screen, which shows the current state.
2 Adjust the Status Audible Warning to the required setting (Enabled or

Disabled)

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Performance Audible Warning

Element Manager.
Performance Audible Warning is the automatic audible warning of performance events

reported at the LCT. The facility can be either enabled or disabled.
Reporting > Performance Audible Warning
1 Select Performance Audible Warning from the path shown to display the
Performance Audible Warning screen, which shows the current state.
2 Adjust the Performance Audible Warning to the required setting (Enabled or

Disabled).
LED Global Inhibit

Use this function to globally set the lighting of card alarm LEDs to inhibited or automatic.
This function causes the Alarm LED to light (LEDs Auto) or to not to light (LEDs
Inhibited) on all cards, apart from the fault LEDs on the power supply units.
Path: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window > Fault Management > Local
Alarm Scheme > LED Global Inhibit
1 Select LED Global Inhibit from the path shown to display the LED Global
Inhibit screen, which shows the current state of the facility (LEDs Auto or LEDs
Inhibited).
2 Set the LED Global Inhibit State to the required value.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Alarm Bus Driver

The Alarm Bus Driver controls the output of local alarm indications to the rack and shelf
alarm schemes.
The Comms/Controller only outputs the indications (Top of Rack/Shelf Display LEDs)
when the Alarm Bus Driver is Enabled.
The LCT and the EM operators each have a measure of control over the Alarm Bus
Driver. The effects are that for the bus driver to be enabled, both must call for it to be
enabled. If either operator calls for it to be disabled, the bus driver is disabled. If the EM
fails, the associated control automatically calls for enabled (provision is not revertive).
Use this function to display the current state of the Alarm Bus Driver (Top of Rack and
End of Shelf) and change it as required.
Path: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window > Fault Management > Local
Alarm Scheme > Alarm Bus Driver
1 Select Alarm Bus Driver from the path shown to display the Alarm Bus Driver
screen, which shows its current state(s), Top of Rack (ToR) and End of Shelf
(EoS).
Figure 11-10: Alarm Bus Driver Enable/ Disable
2 Set the Alarm Bus Driver ToR and EoS to the required value (Enabled or
Disabled).
· Both of the driver states (ToR and EoS) are affected

(Enabled/Disabled) at the same time.
3 Select Apply to send the data to the Core A card Card.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Cancel All Local Alarms

Element Manager.
Use this function to globally cancel all locally raised and unserviced alarms using the
Bw7R scheme.
Path: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window > Fault Management > Cancel
Local Alarms
1 Select Cancel Local Alarms from the path shown to access the Cancel Local
Alarms screen, which asks for confirmation that you want to continue.
2 Select Yes to cancel all local alarms and return to the Local Craft Terminal:
SMA1/4UC window.
Historic Alarm Log

The Historic Alarm Log records the alarms that have been raised and cleared over the
period selected in the Historic Alarm Log Filter - see Figure 11-12. The alarms are
presented as a list.
Path: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window > Fault Management > NE Event
Logs > Historic Alarm > All
1 Select All from the path shown to display the NE Historic Alarm Log screen.
You can clear events from the log but you cannot amend the log entries.
Figure 11-11: Historic Alarm Log
2 The following functions are available:

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
· Refresh: refreshes the log and takes you to the last entry.
· Clear Log: completely clears the log of all reports.
· Print: see Print Function in Chapter 2:.
Note: For Clear Log, you are asked for confirmation of your action. Select
Yes to clear the log.
Historic Alarm Log Filter

The Historic Alarm Log Filter allows you to set a filtering period to select the alarms that
appear in the Historic Alarm Log. Only those alarms that were recorded in the selected
filtering period will appear in the log.
You set this period in the Set NE Historic Alarm Log Filter screen. It consists of the
date in Day, Month and Year format, together with the time in hours and minutes (for
both start and end times).
Logs > Historic Alarm > Set Filter
1 Select Set Filter from the path shown to display the Set NE Historic Alarm Log
Filter screen, which shows the current Historic Alarm Log Filter date and time
ranges.
Figure 11-12: Historic Alarm Log Filter
2 Change the start and finish times as required.
Note: Depending on previous operations, the current display could be either

the default values (01 January 1990, 00 hours and 00 minutes) or
3 Select OK to accept the settings and open the Historic Alarm Log with those
records that match the filter settings, or select Cancel to return to the Local

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Intermittent Historic Alarm Log

The Intermittent Historic Alarm Log records the intermittent alarms since recording
began or since the log was last cleared. This log shows alarm events that do not persist
long enough to be classified as a full alarm.
Logs > Historic Alarm > Intermittent
1 Select Intermittent from the path shown to display the NE Historic Alarm Log
screen, which shows the Historic Alarm Log but containing only intermittent
alarm entries. You can clear entries from the log but you cannot amend the log
entries.
Figure 11-13: Intermittent Historic Alarm Log
Note: For Clear Log, you are asked to confirm your action. Select Yes to
clear the log.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Historic Status Event Log

The Historic Status Event Log records the status events that have occurred over the
period selected in the Historic Status Event Log Filter - see Historic Status Event Log
Filter on page 181. The status events are presented as a list.
Logs > Historic Status > All
1 Select All from the path shown to display the NE Historic Status Event Log
screen. You can clear entries from this screen but you cannot amend the log
entries.
Figure 11-14: Historic Status Log

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Historic Status Event Log Filter

The Historic Status Log Filter allows you to set a filtering period to select the alarms that
appear in the Historic Status Log. Only those alarms that were recorded in the selected
filtering period will appear in the log.
You set this period in the Set NE Historic Status Log Filter screen. It consists of the
date in Day, Month and Year format, together with the time in hours and minutes (for
both start and end times).
Logs > Historic Status > Set Filter
1 Select Set Filter from the path shown to display the NE Historic Status Event
Log Filter screen, which shows the current NE Historic Status Log Filter date
and time range limits.
2 Change the start and finish times as required.

3 Select OK to accept the settings and open the Historic Status Event Log with
those records that match the filter settings, or select Cancel to return to the
Historic Performance Event Log

The Historic Performance Event Log records the performance events that have
occurred over the period selected in the NE Historic Performance Event Log Filter on
.page 182. The events are presented as a list.
Logs > Historic Status > All
1 Select All from the path shown to display the NE Historic Performance Event
Log screen. You can clear entries from this screen but you cannot amend the
log entries.
Figure 11-15: Historic Performance Event Log

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
· Print: see Print Function in Chapter 2:
NE Historic Performance Event Log Filter

The Historic Performance Log Filter allows you to set a filtering period to select the
alarms that appear in the Historic Performance Log. Only those alarms that were
recorded in the selected filtering period will appear in the log.
You set this period in the Set NE Historic Performance Log Filter screen. It consists
of the date in Day, Month and Year format, together with the time in hours and minutes
(for both start and end times).
Logs > Historic Performance > Set Filter
1 Select Set Filter from the path shown to display the Set NE Historic
Performance Log Filter screen, which shows the current NE Historic
Performance Log Filter date and time range limits.
2 Change the start and end dates as required.

3 Select OK to accept the settings and open the Historic Performance Log with
those records that match the filter settings, or select Cancel to return to the
Inhibited Historic Performance Event Log

The Inhibited Historic Performance Event Log records the inhibited performance events
that have occurred over a given period. This log shows performance events that have
been inhibited. The events are presented as a list.
Logs > Historic Performance > Inhibited
1 Select Inhibited from the path shown to display the NE Historic Performance
Event Log screen, which shows the Historic Performance Event Log but
containing only inhibited event entries. You can clear entries from the log but
you cannot amend the log entries.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Note: For Clear Log, you are asked to confirm your action. Select Yes to
clear the log.
Current Status Event Log

The Current Status Event Log records the current status events. The events are
presented as a list.
Logs > Current Status
1 Select Current Status from the path shown to display the NE Current Status
Event Log screen.
Current Performance Event Log

The Current Performance Event Log records the current performance events. The
events are presented as a list.
Logs > Current Performance
1 Select Current Performance from the path shown to display the NE Current
Performance Event Log screen.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Configure Log Attributes

There are five Configure Log Attribute functions:
· Configure Historic Alarm Event Log Attributes
· Configure Historic Status Event Log Attributes
· Configure Historic Performance Event Log Attributes
· Configure Current Status Event Log Attributes
· Configure Current Performance Event Log Attributes.
This section describes the xxx Event Log Attributes function, as the procedure for
setting the Attributes works in the same way for all five functions.
The Attribute setting dictates how a log should behave once it gets full.
Use this function to set the attribute to Wrap or Halt. In either case, the log generates a
threshold alarm event when the pre-configured percentage of the allocated log memory
is in use. This percentage is set in the Log Capacity Alarm Threshold. The threshold
alarm remains active until the log is cleared (at which point the data integrity attribute
reverts to true).
· Wrap: In this state the log continues to store event records until full and then
starts to overwrite the oldest existing records (setting the data integrity
attribute to false and thus raising a log full alarm).
· Halt: In this state the log continues to store event records until full (setting the
data integrity attribute to false and thus raising a log full alarm). No new event
records can be stored until the log has either been cleared or reconfigured to
Wrap.
Logs > Configure > xxx Event Log Attributes
1 Select xxx Event Log Attributes from the path shown to display the xxx Alarm
Event Log Attributes screen.
2 Change the attribute setting as required.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Log Capacity Alarm Threshold

The various logs have a common area in which to set up the threshold level value for
the SMA1/4UC logs.
Capacity Alarm Thresholds for the equipment can be configured to operate to the
values of 50%, 60%, 70% or 80%. The default value being 70%. These calculations are
performed on the ratio of memory used for records (not management overhead) to
maximum memory required by the log.
A separate alarm event is raised for each log that reaches its threshold.
Logs > Configure > Log Capacity Alarm Threshold
1 Select Log Capacity Alarm Threshold from the path shown to access the NE
Log Capacity Alarm Threshold screen.
2 Set the threshold as required to one of the following values 50%, 60%, 70% or
80% (70% is the default value).

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Display Graphical Alarms

Use this function to display a graphical display of the alarm LED/Card alarm states on
the respective card slots. When a card alarm is activated then it is shown pictorially on
the screen.
You can display the card alarm state from this screen as long as the graphical alarm
condition is enabled, see. If the graphical display is disabled, then no indication is
shown at the LCT.
Note: The LED indications detailed on the LCT screen (see Figure 11-16) are a
snapshot, and only change when the screen is refreshed (see Refresh
Graphical Alarms on Page 187.
Figure 11-16: Graphical Card Alarm Display
Path: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window > Fault Management > Graphical
Alarms > Display
1 Select Display from the path shown to display the Graphical Alarms screen,
which has two buttons On and Off showing the current state of the facility.
2 Set the required value either On (LEDs displayed) or Off (LEDs not displayed).
4 Select Cancel to return to the Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window and
investigate alarm conditions as necessary by selecting the appropriate card on
which an LED symbol is present.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Refresh Graphical Alarms

A graphical display of the alarm LED/card alarm states can be displayed on the
respective card slots on the Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window (shelf layout
screen). When a card alarm is activated then it is shown pictorially on the screen.
You can display the card alarm state from this screen as long as the graphical alarm
condition is enabled. This information can be updated as and when required by using
the Refresh procedure outlined in the following text.
Note: This procedure is only effective when the Graphical Display feature is enabled,
the cards are logically configured and physically fitted in the shelf.
Path: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window > Fault Management > Graphical
Alarms > Refresh
1 Select Refresh from the path shown to display a Question box.
Select Yes to refresh the Graphical Alarm Display and send the data to the
Comms/Controller Card. If all is OK, then you are returned to the Local Craft

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Blank Page

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Chapter 12:
Status Menu
Figure 12-1: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC Window - Status Menu (LCT)
Figure 12-2: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC Window - Status Menu (LCTS)
Note: For the LCTS running under ServiceOn Optical Element Manager:
· Commission - see Chapter 6:, Commissioning
· NE Configuration leads to a further menu with the three further options listed
below. These are covered in Chapter 7:, After-Commissioning Procedures:
- See Back Up SDH/Card Configuration Data on page 57.
- See Restore SDH/Card Configuration Data on page. 59
- See Restore IS-IS Static Data on page 60.
Set NE Online/offline
Use this function to set the Comms/Controller on/off-line. You must set the
Comms/Controller on-line to make the NE operative.
When taken off-line, the Comms/Controller will lose all communications between the
cards in the NE, and it will need to be set on-line again so that the NE can become
operative once more.
Note: Do not set the NE Off Line without consulting the Network Management
Controller, as it can cause serious problems to the network. This function is
usually required during an upgrade procedure that is being carried out from an
EM under control of the Network Management Controller.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Path: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window > Status > Set NE Online/Offline
1 Select Set NE Online/Offline from the path shown.
2 Select the Set NE Online or Set NE Offline radio button as required and select
OK to effect the change.
Figure 12-3: Set NE Online/Offline
3 If you are setting the NE on-line, the following screen warns that this will
reconfigure the traffic cards.
Figure 12-4: Setting the NE Online Warning Dialogue Screen
4 Select OK to set the NE on-line and return to the Local Craft Terminal:
SMA1/4UC window.
Note: Once the Comms/Controller is set on-line during the commissioning

process, then it will remain on-line until you are directed to set it off-
line. Do not set it off-line without first checking with the Network
Management Controller.
5 If you are setting the NE off-line, the a screen warns that whilst the NE is off-line
any configuration changes will be stored on the Controller only.
6 Select OK to set the NE off-line and return to the Local Craft Terminal:
SMA1/4UC window.
Note: Setting the NE Offline will store Configuration Changes on the

Controller only. Once the NE is set off-line, all communications
between the Comms/Controller and the cards in the NE will be lost.
The NE will remain off-line until it is set back on-line.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Remote NE Management
system within SDH networks, for the function and applicability of Network Addresses.
Refer to that chapter for full operational details. Use this function to enter a remote NE’s
address. This function then allows the remote NE to behave as though it is connected to
the local NE. The Network Planner should supply the remote NE's address.
Note: This function is a duplication of the function available from the Local Craft
Terminal opening menu, described in Chapter 7: After-Commissioning
Procedures.
Decommission NE
Decommissioning the SMA1/4UC renders the Comms/Controller inoperative and the
multiplexer’s existing configuration (alarm set–up, synchronisation, cross connection
configuration and so on), will be lost.
The SMA1/4UC will have to be recommissioned before it can be put back into service.
This procedure is rarely used, normally only if a complete equipment is being moved, or
a new Comms/Controller Card is being installed for example.
1 Select Decommission from the path shown to display a Warning screen.
2 To proceed with decommissioning, select OK. Data is sent to the

Note: You now return:
· LCT user - to the Local Craft Terminal opening window.
· LCTS user - to the Shelf screen
Inspect the Comms/Controller Card to make sure that the amber LED is not
flashing (indicating it is still communicating with the multiplexer) before powering
down the multiplexer. At this point you can exit or recommission the multiplexer.
Note: When recommissioning the multiplexer a forced restoration must be

applied to the Comms card.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Blank Page

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Chapter 13:
Connections Menu
CAUTION!
In cross connections windows referred to in this chapter, it is best to use the
mouse when selecting the source/destination card. If you need to use the cursor
keys instead of the mouse, then you must allow the windows to refresh after each
keystroke before making the next keystroke.
Figure 13-1: Connections Menu
The Connections menu leads to the Cross Connection Details screen that has a
menu structure of its own as shown in Figure 13-3.
Display Cross-connections
Use this function to view the cross-connection status of STM-N cards and tributary
cards on an individual card/slot basis.
Path: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window > Connections > Connections >
Cross-Connection Details screen
1 Select Connections from the path shown to display the Cross-Connection

Details screen.
2 Select the card in the Source Card box from which the cross-connection is to
originate. This box contains a pop up list of slots/cards to which connection
procedures are applicable.
3 This screen presents a list of current cross connections for that card. See Figure
13-2.
Figure 13-2: Cross Connection Details

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
4 Select Print from the File menu in the Cross-Connection Details screen to
print out a copy of the screen or Close to return to the Local Craft Terminal:
SMA1/4UC window.
The rest of this chapter describes the other functions available from the menus on the
Cross-Connection Details screen. In the above example a Packetspan card has been
chosen and only File and Path are available.
Figure 13-3 displays a composite image of the functionality available but what is
actually available depends on the type of card selected in the Cross Connections
Details screen
For an SDH card : File, Card, Path are available
For a PDH card: File, Path, Port are available
For a Packetspan card :File, Path are available
13.1.1 Cross-Connection Details Screen
Figure 13-3: Cross-Connection Details - Menu Structure
Note: Card Menu See Card Menuon page 195
Note: Path Menu –See Path Menu on Page 211
Note: Port Menu - Port Configuration leads to a further Port Configuration screen
with its own menu structure - see Figure 13-52 on page 245

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
13.2 File Menu

This allows you to either exit the Cross Connection Details screen or to print the
details as described in Print Function on page 34.
13.3 Card Menu

Note: Available Facilities for each connection depend on the types of card and the
state of the connection.
HOVC Config (HO Path Trace Configuration)

You can independently configure the transmitted and expected higher order path trace
ID on a per HO path basis. You must configure a PDH cross-connection for the line
before you can carry out this path trace function. All operations are performed on a
slot/card basis.
You can enable or disable the expected path trace ID on a per path basis. The path
trace ID consists of a fifteen-byte string of ASCII characters.
Cross-Connection Details screen > Card > HOVC Config
Note: HOVC #1 _TC is only available if TRUE_TCM has been enabled.

Details screen.
2 Select the line card on which the cross-connection exists from the Source Card
box to display the Cross-Connection Details screen for that card (for example
Core A Line West), showing current cross-connections.
3 Make sure that the line from which the cross-connection originates is shown as
connected, and select the relevant cross-connection.
4 Select Card and then HOVC Config from the path shown to access the HOVC
Config screen. The screen has three tabs - HOVC #1, HOVC #1 TC and Traffic
Mode. Figure 13-4 describes the HOVC #1 tab.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Figure 13-4: HOVC Config - HOVC #1
Table 13-1: HOVC #1 Tab Entries
Parameter Options Default
Transmitted Path Trace: Path Trace ID 15 byte ASCII string
Expected Path Trace Enabled/Disabled Disabled
Expected Path Trace: Path Trace ID 15 byte ASCII string
Disabled
10E-5
10E-6
10E-7
Path SD Config: SD Mechanism USE
10E-8
10E-9
USE
CDEG
Path SD Config: USE/CDEG On Threshold 1-20 5
Path SD Config: USE/CDEG Off Threshold 1-20 10
Pipeline
Pipeline to Subnetwork
Pipeline Mode Config No Pipeline
Boundary
No Pipeline

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
5 Select Apply to send your changes to the Comms/Controller Card. describes

the HOVC #1 TC tab.
Note: HOVC #1 tab is only enabled for True TCM.
Figure 13-5: HOVC Config - HOVC #1 TC Tab
Table 13-2: HOVC #1 Tab Entries
Transmitted TC Trace: TC Trace ID 15 Byte ASCII string
Expected TC Trace Enabled/Disabled Disabled
Expected TC Trace: TC Trace ID 15 byte ASCII string
Disabled
TC SD Config TC SD Mechanism USE USE
CDEG
TC SD Config USE/CDEG On
1-20 5
Threshold
TC SD Config USE/CDEG Off

1-20 10
Threshold
Expected TC Equipping Unequipped/Equipped Unequipped

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Note: To avoid a temporary mismatch and possible burst of AIS when altering a
Tandem Trace ID:
- Disable the TC (Tandem Connection) equipping and select Apply.

- Disable the path trace and select Apply.
- Alter the ID and select Apply.
- Enable the path trace and select Apply.
- Enable the TC equipping and select Apply.
Note: This traffic mode is only available to Concatenation to Virtual STM-4 card.
6 Select Apply to send your changes to the Comms/Controller Card.
Figure 13-6: Traffic Mode Tab (C to V cards)
Table: 13-3: Traffic Mode Tab Entries
Standard VC4 Mode

VC4 C to V Mode Standard VC4 Mode
Conversion Mode
Enabled
Path Trace Insertion Disabled
Disabled
Buffer Overflow Threshold (ms) -128000 to 128000 128000
Note: If VC4 C to V Mode is set to Standard VC4 Mode, then Path Trace Insertion
and Buffer Overflow Threshold are set to their default values and you cannot
change them.
8 Select Cancel to return to the Connection Details screen.
9 Select Close from the File menu in Cross-Connection Details screen to return
to the Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Section Configuration
You can independently configure the transmitted and expected section path trace ID on
a per line basis.
Note: Section traces must be configured when using Single Fibre Working (SFW) on
the dual STM-1 optical card.
All operations are performed on a slot/card basis.
You can enable or disable the expected section trace ID on a per line basis and the
Transmitted Section Trace Detection (single fibre operation). The section trace ID
consists of a fifteen-byte string of ASCII characters.
Section trace identities can be set for STM line cards or STM tributaries.
Cross-Connection Details screen > Card > Section Config

Details screen.
2 Select the required slot from which the cross-connection is to originate, from the
Source Card box. This will display the cross connection details for that card.
3 Select the appropriate section/connection, Card option and Section Config to

display the Section Config screen. This screen has three tabs: Section,
Synchronisation and AU Pointer Strategy.
4 The Section tab is shown in Figure 13-7.
Figure 13-7: Section Trace Configuration - Section Tab
For the Section tab, allowable parameters are:

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
· Transmitted/Expected Section Trace - Format: Access Point ID or

Disable (the default is Disable)
· Transmitted/Expected Section Trace - Section Trace ID: 15byte ASCII

string
· Transmitted Section Trace Detection: Enabled or Disabled (the default

is Disabled)
-5 -9
· Section SD Config - SD Mechanism: Disabled, 10 to 10 or
USE/CDEG (the default is USE)
· Section SD Config - USE/CDEG On/Off Threshold: 1 to 20 (the default

is 5 for On, 10 for Off)
· Section EBER: Enabled or Disabled (the default is Enabled and is

greyed out for true TCM)
· Sub-Network Boundary: True or False (the default is False).
Figure 13-8: Section Configuration - Synchronisation Tab

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
For the Synchronisation tab, allowable parameters are:
· SSMB: Fixed SSMB: Enabled or Disabled (the default is Disabled)
· SSMB Value: 0000 to 1111 Binary Value (the default is 1111)
· Destination ID: 52-character string.
Figure 13-9: Section Configuration - AU Pointer Strategy Tab
AU Pointer Strategy tab, allowable parameters are:
· SS Bit Config - Tx/Rx: 11, 01, 00 SONET, 10 SDH

(the default is 10 SDH)
6 Select Cancel to return to the Cross-Connection Details screen.
7 Select Close from the File menu in Cross Connection Details screen to return

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Card Performance Reports

Use this function to view and clear all card performance records and their reporting
states. They display on a selected card basis. Available options depend on the type of
card selected. For example, for RS Near-end or STM-n, select STM-1/4 MS Near-
end/Far-end.
You can also view traffic path performance reports on a selected path basis. See Path
Performance Reports on page 233
Cross-Connection Details screen > Card > Performance > Reports

Details screen.
2 Select the appropriate card from the Source Card box to display a list of current
cross-connections.
3 Select Reports.from the path shown to access the All Performance Reporting
States screen. See Figure 13-10.
Figure 13-10: All Performance Reporting States
4 Select a Primitive Type that you want to work with from the list.
5 To change the Exception state to Enabled/Disabled, select Set States. See

Figure 13-11.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Figure 13-11: Performance Reporting States
6 Select Apply and Cancel to close the Performance Reporting States screen
and return to the All Performance Reporting States screen as shown in Figure
13-10.
7 To view the Performance Reports screen for the selected primitive type, select
Report from the All Performance Reporting States screen.
Figure 13-12: Performance Reports
8 Set the Report Period to 15 minute or 24 hour as required.
9 Select Refresh to refresh the Performance Reports screen or OK to return to

the All Performance Reporting States screen.
10 Select OK to return to the Cross-Connection Details screen.
11 Select Close from the File menu in the Cross-Connection Details screen to

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Card UAT/CSES Performance Records

There are separate functions to display and clear both the UnAvailable Time (UAT) and
Consecutive Severely Errored Seconds (CSES) records. The functions are substantially
the same and so are covered here together.
The records display on a per card type basis. The available options depend on the type
of card selected
Note: Un available Time is a term for a period of time that starts at the beginning of
the first second of a period of SES (Severely Errored Second) that exceeds the
Start of Unavailability Event (SUE) threshold. This period ends at the beginning
of the first second of a period of non-SES that exceeds the Termination of
Unavailability Event (TUE) threshold.
Note: Traffic Path Performance Reports can be viewed on a selected path basis. To
do so, use the options from the Path menu - see Path Performance Reports for
details).
Cross-Connection Details screen > Card > Performance > UAT/CSES
Records > Required End > Display or Clear

Details screen.
2 Select the appropriate card from the Source Card box to display a list of cross
connections for that card, then select the port that you want to work with from
the list available.
3 Select either UAT Records or CSES Records from the path shown, and the
required end, then either Display or Clear as required.
· Display shows the UAT/CSES Records screen for the chosen end (RS
Near-end, etc.). See Figure 13-13 which shows the UAT Records
screen. Select OK to close this screen.
· Clear clears the last six performance records. You are asked for
confirmation before continuing.
Figure 13-13: UAT Records

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Card Performance Exception Thresholds

Use this function to view and amend all Card Performance Exception Thresholds. When
a threshold is crossed, a performance event is raised.
You can view and amend Traffic Path Performance Exception Thresholds on a selected
path basis. To do so, use the Path menu - see Path Performance Reports for details).
Cross-Connection Details screen > Card > Performance > Exception
Thresholds > Required End

Details screen.
2 Select the appropriate card from the Source Card box to display the cross-
connections for that card.
3 Select the required end from the path shown to access the Exception
Thresholds screen for that end (see Figure 13-43).
Figure 13-14: Exception Thresholds
The thresholds have the following units:
· 15 Min ES and 24 Hr ES threshold values are in Errored Seconds (ES)
· 15 Min SES and 24 Hr SES threshold values are in Severely Errored

Seconds (SES)
4 Amend the threshold values as required by highlighting the required Event

Report Threshold and then entering a new value in the Modify Threshold box.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Section Overhead Byte Values

Use this function to view specific Section Overhead (SOH) byte values. The SOH bytes
are transmitted in the line signal carried via the SMA1/4UC cards. Received SOH bytes
appear on a single screen on a per card or line basis.
Cross-Connection Details screen > Card > SOH Byte Values

Details screen.
2 Select the appropriate card from the Source Card box to display the Cross-
Connection Details screen for that card. The screen presents a list of current
cross-connections.
3 Select SOH Byte Values from the path shown to access the Section OH Byte
Values screen shown in Figure 13-15.
Figure 13-15: Section OH Byte Values

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
13.3.1 Loopbacks
There are loopback functions for, Section, Tributary and HOVC. The operation for each
function is similar.
As an aid to fault diagnosis, this function loops back the signal path at specific points in
a card. Two types of loopback are available:
· Inward (Loopback to Switch). This effectively loops the card input (receive)
port to card output (transmit) port, i.e. loops back the incoming signal.
· Outward (Loopback to Line). This effectively loops the card output to card
input; i.e. loops back the outgoing signal.
This function is applied to specific cards selected from the Cross-Connection Details
screen.
Loopbacks are not implemented on ETA cards.
Note: Loopback is not available if the connection is locked - see
CAUTION!
Loopbacks must only be applied to traffic paths that have been taken out of
service, and then only when you are fully aware of the network situation,
equipment configuration, and the effects on the network of applying loopbacks.
Refer to Data Loopbacks in the Maintenance Manual before proceeding.
Cross-Connection Details screen > Card > Maintenance > Loopbacks >
Section or HOVC#1

Details screen.
2 Select the appropriate STM-n card from the Source Card box. This displays a
list of current cross-connections for that card.
3 Select Section or HOVC#1 to display the relevant STM-N Loopback State
screen. This shows the card type and loopback state.
4 Set the Loopback State field to the required state as follows:
· None (No Loopback)
· Outward (Loopback to Line)
· Inward (Loopback to Switch).
6 A message box stating that traffic disruption will occur displays, select OK to
effect the loopback or Cancel to return to the Loopbacks screen.
7 Select Cancel in the Loopbacks screen to return to the Connection Details

screen.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Error Injection
There are two error injection functions, Section and HOVC. The operation for both
functions is similar.
As a diagnostic aid, this function injects an STM-N error signal into the traffic path for
STM-n cards only. The facility is used to check the traffic path integrity, usually during
maintenance and in conjunction with the Loopbacks function.
Error Injection is not implemented on ETA cards.
Note: Error injection is not available if the connection is locked - see Set Admin State.
Note: B1, B2 error injection is not available on the STM-4c/v cards configured in
conversion mode.
Cross-Connection Details screen > Card > Maintenance > Error Injection >
Section or HOVC#1

Details screen.
2 Select the appropriate STM-n card from the Source Card box to display the
Cross-Connection Details screen for that card.
3 Select Section or HOVC#1 from the path shown to display the relevant STM-N
Error Injection screen (see Figure 13-16: STM-1 Section Error Injection and
Figure 13-17).
Figure 13-16: STM-1 Section Error Injection
Figure 13-17: STM-1 HOVC# Error Injection
The screens vary, depending on the card type selected.
4 Select the type of error you want to inject.
5 Select Apply to send the data to the SMA1/4UC Comms/Controller Card, which
displays a Warning that injecting errors may lead to a disruption of Traffic.
6 To inject the errors, select OK to return to the Cross-Connection Details

screen.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
PRBS Injection
As a diagnostic aid, this function injects a Pseudo Random Binary Signal (PRBS) into
the traffic path at VC-4 level on the STM-n line/tributary cards. Use this function to
check the traffic path integrity, usually during maintenance and in conjunction with the
Loopbacks facility.
PRBS injection is not applicable to ETA cards.
Note: PRBS injection is not available if the connection is locked - see Set Admin
State.
Cross-Connection Details screen > Card > Maintenance > PRBS Injection >
HOVC

Details screen.
2 Select the appropriate card from the Source Card box to display the cross
connection details for that card.
· The number of ports shown on the screen depends on the type of card
selected.
3 Select Card, Maintenance, PRBS Injection, HOVC to display the relevant PRBS
Injection screen (see Figure 13-18: STM-n PRBS Injection).
Figure 13-18: STM-n PRBS Injection
4 Amend the PRBS injection state as required.
5 Select Apply to send the data to the Comms/Controller card, which displays a
Warning stating that injecting PRBS may lead to a disruption of traffic.
6 To inject PRBS, select OK to return to the Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC

window.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
STM-N Card PRBS Detection

Use this function to view the detection/failure to detect PRBS.
At the appropriate points of the system, a PRBS signal is injected as detailed in the
procedure PRBS Injection. The result for a receiving card can be called up as a read-
only screen accessed via the Cross-Connection Details screen.
Cross-Connection Details screen > Card > Maintenance > PRBS Detect >
HOVC

Details screen.
2 Select an STM-n line/tributary card from the Source Card box to display the
cross connection details for that card.
· The number of ports shown on the screen depends on the type of card
selected.
3 Select Card, Maintenance, PRBS Detect, HOVC, to display the relevant PRBS
Detection screen (see Figure 13-19).
Figure 13-19: PRBS Detection
4 Select OK in the PRBS Detection screen to return to the Cross-Connection

Details screen.
5 Select File, Close in the Cross-Connection Details screen to return to the


SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
13.4 Path Menu
Set Admin State

The various cross-connection related options cannot be performed if the cross
connection is designated as being in the locked state; the cross-connection must firstly
be unlocked.
The default state is unlocked, but each termination can be locked or unlocked as
required.
If manual diagnostics are already applied to a path that is subsequently locked, the
diagnostics are automatically removed.
A protection cross-connection adopts the same admin state as its associated worker
connection.
The constituent connections of a broadcast cross-connection have a single common

admin state.
Locked Functions
The following actions are not available for locked connections:
· Delete the cross-connection
· Configure manual diagnostic functions (Loopbacks, PRBS Injection and Error

Injection) for the connection
· Modify the following PDH tributary input port configurations associated with
the connection:
- change the 2M tributary port mapping option
- change between structured and unstructured traffic
- enable/disable 2M CRC-4 monitoring
- configure asynchronous 2M output timing
- configure signal degrade
· Modify Path Trace ID associated with the connection
Cross-Connection Details screen > Path > Set Admin State

Details screen.
2 Select the card from which the cross-connection is to originate, from the Source
Card box. This contains a drop-down list of slots/cards to which connection

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
3 The Cross-Connection Details screen then presents a list of current cross

4 Select the connection that you want to amend.
5 Select Set Admin State from the path shown to access the Set Admin State
screen (see Figure 13-20). This screen shows both the selected source port
(channel) and the selected destination port to which the connection is made,
together with their current admin status.
Figure 13-20: Set Admin State
6 Change the Admin State and select OK to either lock or unlock the connection
and send the data to the Comms/Controller Card.
· If you are locking the connection go to Step 7.
· If you are unlocking the connection go to Step 9.
7 A Warning dialogue displays, which states that locking a connection will reset
any diagnostics currently being applied to it.
8 Select OK in the Warning to lock the connection and continue, or select Cancel
to return to the Set Admin State screen.
9 Make sure the details on the Cross-Connection Details screen are correctly
amended.
Create Cross-connection - Point To Point

Use this function to create the following types of point to point cross-connection.
· Line-to-Line
· Line-to-Tributary
· Tributary-to-Tributary
Note: Several types of connection exist: Point to Point is the basic connection and is
illustrated as P-P in the screens. A multi-point connection is also configurable
and is illustrated as either Rx (Receive) or Tx (Transmit). A further option is

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Supervisory Un-equipped, which is shown as connection Sup. Uneq. and type

VC-12/2/3/4 SU.
Cross-Connection Details screen > Path > Create Cross Connection >
Point to Point

Details screen.
Card box that contains a pop up list of cards to which connection procedures
are applicable.
3 The Cross-Connection Details screen presents a list of current cross-

4 Make sure that the port from which the cross-connection is to originate is
unconnected. Select the port and then select the Destination Card box.
5 Select the destination card. The Destination Card box lists cards to which the
intended cross-connection can be terminated. Make sure that the port to which
the cross-connection is to be made is shown as unconnected, then select the
required port.
6 Select Point to Point from the path shown to access the Create Cross-
Connections screen. (See Figure 13-21). This screen shows both the selected
source port and the selected destination port to which connection is to be made,
together with the traffic type.
Figure 13-21: Create Cross Connection
7 Select the Traffic Type as required and select OK to send the data to the
8 Make sure the details on the Cross-Connection Details screen are correct (the
display reflects the change).

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Supervisory Un-equipped Connections

Use this function to create Supervisory Un-equipped connections.
Note: Several types of cross-connection exist: point to point is the basic connection
and is illustrated as P-P in the screens. A multi-point connection also exists and
is illustrated as either Rx (Receive) or Tx (Transmit). A further option is
supervisory un-equipped which is shown as connection Sup. Uneq. and type
VC-12/2/3/4 SU.
Cross-Connection Details screen > Path > Supervisory Unequipped >
Create

Details screen.
2 Select the card from which the cross-connection is to originate, in the Source
Card box to display the Cross-Connection Details screen for that card. The
screen presents a list of current cross-connections (see Figure 13-22).
Figure 13-22: Cross Connection Details
3 Select an unconnected port, then select Supervisory Unequipped and Create

from the path shown to access the Create Connections Supervisory
Unequipped screen in Figure 13-23. This shows the selected port together with
traffic type.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Figure 13-23: Create Supervisory Unequipped
4 Select the Traffic Type required and select OK to send the data to the
entry is shown as changed).
Configure Supervisory Un-equipped Connections

Use this function to configure supervisory unequipped connections.
Note: Modify Path Trace ID is not available if the connection is locked - see Set Admin
State on page 233.
Config

Details screen.
2 Select the card from the Source Card box to display the cross-connection
details. The screen shows a list of current cross-connections
3 Select the Supervisory Unequipped cross-connection to be viewed.
4 Select Config from the path shown to access the Supervisory Unequipped
Details screen (see Figure 13-24).

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Figure 13-24: Supervisory Unequipped Details
Change the settings as required. The allowable field entries are:
· Transmitted/Expected Path Trace Path Trace IDs: 15byte ASCII

string.
· Expected Path Trace: Enabled or Disabled (the default is Disabled.)
-5 -6 -9
· Path SD Config: Disabled, 10 , 10 , etc. to 10 and USE/CDEG (the
default is USE.)
· USE/CDEG Threshold On: 1-20 (the default is 5.)
· USE/CDEG Threshold Off: 1-20 (the default is 10.)
Note: USE/CDEG Off thresholds should always be set greater than the On
period.
display reflects changes).

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Delete Supervisory Un-equipped Connections

Use this function to delete supervisory unequipped connections. A connection must be
in the unlocked state before it can be deleted.
Note: If a connection is Locked, then it must firstly be unlocked before you can delete
it. See Supervisory Unequipped - Admin State below.
Delete

Details screen.
2 Select the card from which the cross-connection originates, in the Source Card
box to display the cross-connection details for that card.
3 Select the cross-connection to be deleted.
4 Select Path > Supervisory Unequipped > Delete to access the Question box in
Figure 13-25.
Figure 13-25: Confirm Deletion
5 If you want to delete the indicated connection, select Yes.
entry will be shown as changed).

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Supervisory Unequipped - Admin State

Use this function to set the admin state of a supervisory unequipped connection to
either Locked or Unlocked.
Note: All actions performed on Supervisory Un-equipped connections are non-traffic

affecting. These connections are normally used to check POH and routes
through SMAs, etc. before they are put into service.
Admin State

Details screen.
2 Select the card from which the cross-connection originates, in the Source Card
box to display the Cross-Connection Details screen for that card.
3 Make sure that the Supervisory Un-equipped connection from which the admin
state is to be changed is either locked/unlocked.
4 Select the Supervisory Unequipped Connection that requires a change of state.
5 Select Path, Supervisory Unequipped and Admin State to access the Set
Admin State screen (see Figure 13-26). This shows the selected port and the
current Admin State.
Figure 13-26: Set Admin State
6 Change the state as required and select OK to send data to the

7 If you are setting the state to Locked, a Warning dialogue box states that
locking a connection will reset any diagnostics currently being applied to it.
8 Select Yes in the dialogue box to lock the connection.
display will reflect changes).

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Broadcast (Multi-point) Cross-connections

Use this function to perform various broadcast cross-connection related options (create,
delete, change admin/protection state). All operations are performed on a card basis.
You can create broadcast connections between a single source channel (from line or
tributary) to multiple destination channels (any mixture of line and tributary).
For broadcast operation each constituent connection is unidirectional. However, the

return path is not available for allocation to another cross-connection.
You can add cross-connections to expand an existing broadcast connection, the added
connection(s) adopt the admin state of the other constituent connections. The
constituent connections of a broadcast cross-connection have a single common admin
state.
Note: Several types of connection exist: Point to Point is the basic connection and is
illustrated as P-P in the screens. A broadcast (multi-point) connection is also
configurable and is illustrated as either Rx (Receive) or Tx (Transmit). A further
option is supervisory unequipped which is shown as connection Sup. Uneq. and
type VC-12/2/3/4 SU.
Cross-Connection Details screen > Path > Create Cross Connection >
Broadcast

Details screen.
Card box that contains a pop up list of slots/cards to which connection
3 The Cross-Connection Details screen presents a list of current cross-

4 Make sure that the port (channel) from which the cross-connection is to
originate is shown as unconnected, and select the required path/port (e.g. LEA
#1).
Note: To create broadcast connections it is essential to select the transmit end card as
the source card and the receive as the destination card. The transmit port may
be selected repeatedly to build up the multiple ’legs’ of broadcast connections.
5 Select the destination slot. The Destination Slot portion of the screen shows a
list of slots/cards to which the intended cross-connection can be made. Make
sure that the port (channel) at which the cross-connection is to be made is
shown as unconnected, and select the required path/port (for example, LWA
#1).
6 Select Path, Create Cross-Connection and Broadcast to access the Create

Cross-Connections screen.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Figure 13-27: Create Cross-Connection
7 The Create Cross-Connections screen (see Figure 13-27), shows both the
selected source port (channel) and also the selected destination port to which
connection is to be made, together with the traffic type.
8 If the type is amendable and you wish to change the traffic type or create a
connection, change the traffic type and select OK to send the data to the
9 Make sure the details on the Create-Connection Details screen are correct
(the display reflects changes made). You can make further connections by
selecting a new destination card (Rx) and the same source as before.
10 Once you have set up the necessary broadcast connections, they may be
viewed by selecting the Tx connection card/port (e.g. Core A Line West) as the
source card. Select Path, Broadcast Cross-Connection Details. For an example
of a Broadcast Connection Details screen, see Figure 13-28.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Figure 13-28: Broadcast Cross-Connection Details
Note: Broadcast connections can also be deleted and admin states amended from a
menu accessed via Connections in the Broadcast Connection Details screen.
These features can also be invoked from the main Cross-Connections screen,
but only at the Rx end.
Note: SNC Protection may also be added to a broadcast (Rx) connection. In doing so,
all Rx connections forming a multiple connection (from a single Tx connection)
will be protected by a single action. Likewise, removal of SNC protection (on a
single Rx connection forming a multiple group) causes all of the connections
previously protected in the multiple group to have SNC protection removed
simultaneously.
11 To return to the Cross-Connection Details screen, select Close from the File
menu.
Delete Cross-connection
Use this function to remove cross connections from a card.
Note: Delete Cross Connection is not available if the connection is locked - see Set
Admin State on page 233.
Note: If a connection path has protection enabled it cannot be disconnected until

protection is disabled. See Create/Amend SNC Protection (VC-12, VC-2, VC-3
,VC-4) on page 222.
Note: When deleting a broadcast connection, you must delete it by deleting

constituent connections, but only at the Rx end.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Cross-Connection Details screen > Path > Delete Cross Connection

Details screen.
2 Select the card from which the cross-connection is to be deleted, to display the
Cross-Connections Details screen for that card. The screen presents a list of
current cross-connections
3 Select the cross-connection to be deleted. Select Path, Delete Cross-

Connection to access the delete connections Question box
4 To delete the cross connection, select Yes.
display reflects changes made).
Create/Amend SNC Protection (VC-12, VC-2, VC-3 ,VC-4)

The procedures for creating and amending protection are similar. This section describes
creating protection but also covers amending protection.
Use this function to apply SNC (Sub-Network Connection) Protection on connections

relating to the specific tributary/line cards selected. For further details of the protection
features see the associated User Manual.
Applying SNC protection to a broadcast connection results in connections being

automatically added between the other broadcast destinations and the protection path.
Cross-Connection Details screen > Path > Create/Amend SNC Protection

Details screen.
2 Select the card on which the cross-connection exists from the Source Card box
to display the cross connection details for that card.
3 Make sure that the tributary connection exists and select it. Then select the
required card from the Destination Card box, which lists the cards to which
protection can be extended. If you are creating protection, make sure that the
port (channel) for which protection is to be extended is unconnected, and select
the required path/port.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Figure 13-29: Create SNC Protection
4 Select Create SNC Protection from the path shown (see Figure 13-29) to
access the Create SNC Protection screen.
Depending on the required option, select the appropriate tab: Operation, Signal
Degrade, Configuration, Tandem Connection. The screens are illustrated in
Figure 13-30 to Figure 13-33 below.
Note: Signal Degrade is not available if the connection is locked - see Set Admin
State.
Figure 13-30: Create SNC Protection - Operation Tab 1

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Operation: options are:
· Mode: Revertive or Non-Revertive
- Revertive: When a failed worker recovers, traffic is automatically

switched back to the worker (with possible disturbance to traffic)
- Non-Revertive: When a failed worker recovers there is no

automatic switching from the protection back to the worker, thereby
avoiding any unnecessary disturbance to traffic.
· Direction: Unidirectional, Bidirectional or TC 3Bit Protocol
Note: With Bidirectional working, No Fault = No Request Using

Worker/Protection Path. Only one state will be shown at the LCT,
either:
- Remote Request To Use Worker or
- Remote Request To Use Protection.
· Operator Command: Force Switch to Worker, Force Switch to

Protection, Manual Switch to Worker, Manual Switch to Protection.
- Clear: Clears any operator entered command (except Swap

Worker/Protection Designation) and also clears any active wait to
restore (WTR) states. If a WTR state is cleared, the associated
protection group immediately reverts to worker.

continue to be selected from the designated worker card.
Note: The Force To Worker command has a higher priority than locally
detected failures on the worker channel/card and hence traffic remains
selected from the worker card regardless of any failure indications on
the worker channel/card
- Force Switch To Protection: Causes traffic to be selected from, or

continue to be selected from the designated protection card.
Note: The Force Switch To Protection command has a higher priority than
locally-detected failures on the protection channel/card and hence
traffic remains selected from the protection card regardless of any
failure indications on the protection channel/card

continue to be selected from the designated worker card unless a
worker channel/card (SF and SD) have a higher priority than this
manual switch command
- Manual Switch To Protection: Causes traffic to be selected from, or

continue to be selected from the designated protection card unless
a higher priority switch state is in effect. This manual switch

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Figure 13-31: Create SNC Protection - Signal Degrade Tab
Signal Degrade: options are:
· Signal Fail/Signal Degrade Criteria: Path Defects, TCM Defects, Path

and TCM Defects
· Path Signal Degrade Configuration:
-5 -9
- Signal Degrade Mechanism: Disabled, 10 to 10 and
USE/CDEG (the default is USE)
· USE/CDEG On/Off Thresholds: 0-20 (the On default is 5, the Off

default is 10).
Figure 13-32: Create SNC Protection - Configuration Tab
Configuration options are:

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
· SNC Protection Persistency: 0.0 to 20 seconds in 0.1 second steps
Note: You can set a Global SNC Protection Persistency, see SNC
Persistency on page 120. When this global persistency is set, then all
locally generated card or connection persistency levels are overridden
· Signal Fail on EBER: Enabled or Disabled (the default is Enabled)
· Signal Label: 0.181 Test Signal, 34M and 45M Asynchronous

Mapping, ATM, Equipped-Non Specific, FDDI, Locked TU, Man
(DQDB), TUG Structure (the default is Equipped-Non Specific)
· Wait to Restore: this is the period that the system waits after recovery
from failure before traffic is restored from a protection card to the
original worker when protection is revertive, in the range 0 to 30
minutes (default =10).
Figure 13-33: Create SNC Protection - Tandem Connection Tab
Tandem Connection (TC) options are:
· TC Expected Equipping: Unequipped or Equipped (the default is

Unequipped)
· Expected TC SD Config:
-5 -9
- TC SD Mechanism: Disabled, 10 to 10 and USE/CDEG (the
default is USE)
- USE/CDEG On/Off Thresholds: 0-20. (The On default is 5, the Off

default is 10.) The Off threshold must be greater than the On
threshold

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
· Expected TC Trace: Enabled/Disabled
- TC Path Trace ID: 15byte ASCII string.
5 Select OK to send data to the Comms/Controller Card.
6 Select Cancel to return to the Cross-Connection Details screen. Make sure

the details on screen are correct (entry will be shown under protection as LEA
#1 for example).
Note: To make sure that changes have occurred, and are correctly displayed,
firstly exit the feature by selecting Cancel then re-enter the
Create/Amend SNC Protection screen after approximately 10
seconds have elapsed.
Delete SNC Protection (VC-12, VC-2, VC-3 and VC-4)

Use this function to delete SNC (Sub-Network Connection) protection on connections.
Cross-Connection Details screen > Path > Delete SNC Protection

Details screen.
2 Select the appropriate tributary card (protection associated procedures are not
applicable to line cards) from the Source Card box. This displays the Cross-
Connection Details screen for that card with a list of current cross-connections.
3 Make sure that the tributary is cross-connected and protected. Select the port
from which protection is to be deleted.
4 Select Delete SNC Protection from the path shown. You are asked for
confirmation of the deletion (see Figure 13-34).
Figure 13-34: Delete SNC Protection
5 To delete SNC Protection, select Yes to send the data to the Comms/Controller
Card.
6 You are returned to the Cross-Connection Details screen where SNC

Protection will have been deleted.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Swap Worker/Protection (VC-12, VC-2, VC-3 and VC-4)

Use this function to change over the current card designations, for example the card
carrying the west going connection from 'worker' to 'protection' and the card carrying the
east going connection from 'protection' to 'worker'.
Note: Swap worker/protection designation is not available if the connection is locked -

see Set Admin State.
Cross-Connection Details screen > Path > Swap Worker/Protection

Details screen.
2 Select the appropriate tributary card (protection associated procedures are not
applicable to line cards) from the Source Card box to display the Cross-
Connection Details for that card which lists current cross-connections.
3 Make sure the tributary is cross-connected and protected. Select the port
(channel) at which the cross-connection worker/protection state is to be
swapped.
4 Select Swap Worker/Protection from the path shown. You are asked to confirm
your action (see Figure 13-35).
Figure 13-35: Swap Protection
5 To swap worker and protection channels, select Yes to send the data to the
6 You are returned to the Cross-Connection Details screen.
VC Configuration
Use this function to change the VC Configuration. You can set this to Enabled/Disabled
for each VC-n (n=12, 2, 3, or 4) path in a received STM-N signal for alarm monitoring.
The VC Configuration screen can be used to configure TC parameters.
You can specify the STM-N card or unit and the VC-n path to be monitored. When
enabled, the POM function recovers the VC-POH bytes/bits for signal label, BIP, Path
Trace ID and Path Status. The VC-n is unchanged and is passed through, whilst
corresponding alarm information is reported. Expected Path Trace, Section SD Config
and Signal Label can also be viewed from this screen (see Figure 13-36).

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Note: Modify Path Trace ID is not available if the connection is locked - see Set Admin
State.
Cross-Connection Details screen > Path > VC Config

Details screen.
2 Select the appropriate card from the Source Card box to display the Cross-
Connection Details screen for that card which lists current cross-connections.
3 Select the required connection, then select VC Config from the path shown to
access the VC Config screen (see Figure 13-36).
Figure 13-36: VC Config
Allowable settings are:
· Expected/Monitored Path Trace: Enabled or Disabled (the default is

Disabled)
· Expected/Monitored Path Trace - Path Trace ID: 15byte ASCII string

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
· Expected/Monitored Path SD Config:
-5 -9
- SD Mechanism: Disabled, 10 to 10 and USE/CDEG (the default
is USE)

threshold
· Transmitted TC Trace - TC Trace ID: 15byte ASCII string
· Monitored Signal Label (varies with VC type): 0.181 Test Signal, Byte
Synchronous Floating, Asynchronous Floating, Equipped - Non
Specific (the default is Equipped - Non Specific)
· Expected TC Trace: Enabled or Disabled (the default is Disabled)
· Expected TC Trace - TC Trace ID: 15byte ASCII string
· TC SD Config:
- TC SD Mechanism: Disabled, USE (Default) and CDEG

threshold
· Expected TC Equipping: Equipped or Unequipped (the default is

Unequipped)
Through Path Configuration

Path overhead monitoring is a non-intrusive path monitor receive function for through
paths carrying equipped VC-n signals (i.e. containing a signal label other than
Unequipped). (For VC-n, n=12, 2, 3, or 4.) It is available for both High Order and Low
Order paths (HPOM and LPOM respectively).
This feature can be Enabled/Disabled for each path type through a connected VC-n
path in a received STM-N signal.
You can specify the STM-N card or Unit and the VC-n path to be monitored. When
enabled the Path Overhead Monitor (POM) function recovers the VC-POH bytes/bits for
Signal Label, BIP, Path Trace ID and Path Status. The VC-n is unchanged and is
passed through, whilst corresponding alarm information is reported. Expected Path
Trace, Section SD Config and Signal Label can also be viewed from this screen (see
Figure 13-37).

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Cross-Connection Details screen > Path > Through Path Config

Details screen.
2 Select the appropriate card from the Source Card box. This displays the Cross-
Connection Details screen for that card which lists current cross-connections.
3 Select the connection that requires POH Monitoring, then select Through Path
Config from the path shown to access the Through Path Config screen (see
Figure 13-37).).
Figure 13-37: Through Path Configuration
Note: USE Parameters must not be set to 0 for this product release.
The allowable settings are:
· POH Monitor: Enabled or Disabled (the default is Disabled)
· TC Monitored Equipping: Enabled or Disabled (the default is

Disabled)
· Monitored Path Trace: Enabled or Disabled (the default is Disabled)

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
- Monitored Path Trace Path - Trace ID: 15byte ASCII string
· Monitored TC Trace: Enabled or Disabled (the default is Disabled)
- Monitored TC Trace - TC Trace ID: 15byte ASCII string
· Path SD Config:
-5 -9
- SD mechanism: Disabled, 10 to 10 and USE/CDEG (the default
is USE)

threshold
· Monitored TC SD Config:
- TC SD mechanism: Disabled, USE, CDEG (the default is USE)

threshold
· Signal Label (varies with VC type): 0.181 Test Signal, Byte

Synchronous Floating, Asynchronous Floating, Equipped - Non
Specific (the default is Equipped - Non Specific)
· Monitored TC EBER: Enabled/Disabled (the default is Enabled)
Path Overhead Byte Values (PDH)

There are three functions that allow you to view the path overhead (POH) byte values
Through Path (VC-12), Terminated HOVC (VC-4) or Supervisory (for Supervisory
unequipped connections). All functions operate similarly and are covered together in
this section.
The POH bytes are transmitted in the line signal carried via the SMA1/4UC cards, and
appear on a single screen for each path on a selected card.
Cross-Connection Details screen > Path > POH Byte Values

Details screen.
2 Select the appropriate card, e.g. Tributary 1 (2Mbits, 34/45/140Mbit/s, or STM)

from which the cross-connection originates in the Source Card box to display
the cross-connection details for that card. The Source Card box displays
tributary slots/cards to which connection procedures are applicable.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
3 Select the required connection from the Cross-Connection Details screen and
POH Byte Values from the path shown to display the POH Byte Values screen
Figure 13-38: PDH OH Byte Values
Note: The POH Byte Values screen will vary between types of
connection/card.
4 Select OK to return to the Cross-Connections Details screen.
Path Performance Reports

Use this function to view and clear all traffic path performance records and their
reporting states.
Note: Card Path Performance Reports can be viewed on a selected card basis. See
Card Performance Reports on page 202.
Cross-Connection Details screen > Path > Performance > Reports

Details screen.
· If the card is a PDH card, the screen presents a list of current cross-
connections. Select the connection for which the report is required.
· If the card is an STM-n card, you firstly need to select a Through Path
from the Cross-Connection Details to allow records to be read (see
Display Through Path Traffic on page 238).
3 Select Reports... from the path shown to access the All Performance
Reporting States screen. See Figure 13-16.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Note: Synchronisation on reports and reporting states allows access to PPJE

and NPJE Incoming, together with PPJE and NPJE Re-justified
Records.
Figure 13-39: All Performance Reporting States
4 Select the Primitive Type that you want to work with from the list.
5 To change the Exception state to Enabled/Disabled, select Set States. See

Figure 13-40.
Note: Sync reports cannot be enabled at the LCT.
Figure 13-40: Performance Reporting States
6 Select Apply then Cancel to close the Performance Reporting States screen
and return to the All Performance Reporting States screen as shown in Figure
13-39.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
7 To view the Performance Reports screen for the selected primitive type, select
Report to display the All Performance Reporting States screen. See Figure
13-41.
Figure 13-41: Performance Reports
Note: Scheduled reports (15 minute or 24 hour) are enabled at and reported
only to the EM. Exception reports are enabled and reported in the
Historic Performance Logs and to the EM.
· Set the Report Period to 15 minute or 24 hour as required.
· Select Refresh to refresh the Performance Reports screen or OK to

return to the All Performance Reporting States screen.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Path UAT/CSES Performance Records

There are separate functions to display and clear both the UnAvailable Time (UAT) and
Consecutive Severely Errored Seconds (CSES) records. The functions are substantially
the same and so are covered here together.
The records display on a per card type basis. The available options depend on the type
of card selected.
Note: Unavailable Time is a term for a period of time that starts at the beginning of the
first second of a period of SES (Severely Errored Second) that exceeds the
Start of Unavailability Event (SUE) threshold. This period ends at the beginning
of the first second of a period of non-SES that exceeds the Termination of
Unavailability Event (TUE) threshold.
Note: Card Performance Reports can be viewed on a selected card basis. To do so,
use the options from the Card menu see Card Performance Reports for details.
Cross-Connection Details screen > Path > Performance > UAT Records >
Path > End > Display or Clear

Details screen.
2 Select the appropriate card from the Source Card box to display the cross
connections. Select the required connection.
to allow the records to be read (see Display Through Path Traffic
238for details of how to do this).
3 Select either UAT Records or CSES Records from the path shown, and the
required end, then either Display or Clear as required.
· Display shows the UAT/CSES Records screen for the chosen end (RS
Near-end, etc.). See Figure 13-13 which shows the UAT Records
screen. Select OK to close this screen.
· Clear clears the last six performance records. You are asked for
confirmation before continuing.
Note: When you select UAT/CSES the reports do not have access to the
synchronisation feature.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Figure 13-42: UAT Performance Records
Path Performance Exception Thresholds

Use this function to view and amend all Traffic Path Performance Exception Thresholds.
When a threshold is crossed, a performance event is raised.
You can view and amend Card Path Performance Exception Thresholds on a selected
card basis. To do so, use the Card menu, see Card Performance Exception Thresholds
on page 205 for details.
Cross-Connection Details screen > Path > Performance > Exception
Thresholds > Path > End

Details screen.
connections.
to allow records to be read (see Display Through Path Traffic on page
205 for details of how to do this).
3 Select the required end from the path shown to access the Exception
Thresholds screen for that end (see Figure 13-43).

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Figure 13-43: Exception Thresholds
The thresholds have the following units:
· 15 Min ES and 24 Hr ES Threshold values are in Errored Seconds

(ES)
· 15 Min SES and 24 Hr SES Threshold values are in Severely Errored

Seconds (SES)
4 Amend the threshold values as required by highlighting the required Event

Report Threshold and then entering a new value in the Modify Threshold box.
Display Through Path Traffic

Use this function to view the traffic on the selected through path.
Cross-Connection Details screen > Path > Performance > Display Through
Path > Traffic

Details screen.
connection details. The screen presents a list of channels with their current
cross-connection states.
3 Select the connection whose traffic you want to view.
4 Select Traffic from the path shown to access the Display Through Path screen
- see Figure 13-44.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Figure 13-44: Display Through Path
Through Path Synchronisation

Use this function to view the through path synchronisation.
Cross-Connection Details screen > Path > Performance > Display Through
Path > Synchronisation

Details screen.
connection details. The screen presents a list of current cross-connections.
3 Select the connection whose synchronisation you want to view.
4 Select Synchronisation from the path shown to access the Display Through
Path screen illustrated in Figure 13-4.
Figure 13-45: Display Through Path

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Select Through Path Traffic

The through path on STM-n cards requires a path to be selected before monitoring is
allowed. A specific VC path can be selected within an STM-n for East/West or a
selected STM-n tributary number.
Cross-Connection Details screen > Path > Performance > Select Through
Path > Traffic

Details screen.
cross-connections.
3 Select the connection whose through path you want to select.
4 Select Traffic from the path shown to display the Select Through Path screen,
see Figure 13-46.
Figure 13-46: Select Through Path

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Select Through Path Synchronisation

Use this function to select the through path synchronisation.
Cross-Connection Details screen > Path > Performance > Select Through
Path > Synchronisation

Details screen.
cross connections.
3 Select the connection whose synchronisation you want to select.
4 Select Synchronisation from the path shown to access the Select Through
Path screen illustrated in Figure 13-47.
Figure 13-47: Select Through Path
5 Select Apply to send changes to the Comms/Controller Card.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
13.5 Port
Select a port that has been configured on a Core Trib card as shown in Figure 13-48.
Figure 13-48: Selecting a Port From the CC Details Screen
This results in a refreshing of the screen as shown in Figure 13-49.
Figure 13-49: CC Details Screen For a Port
Selecting Port > Port Configuration from the Cross-Connection Details screen calls up
a new screen, the Port Configuration screen with its own menu structure as shown in.
Figure 13-50 and Figure 13-51.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Figure 13-50: Port Configuration Screen
Figure 13-51: Port Configuration Menu Structure

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Port Configurations
All 2, 34, 40, 45 and 140Mbit/s PDH signals are mapped into VC-12s, VC-3s and VC-4s
respectively. The traffic types can be either structured or unstructured on a per port
basis. You can view the type of traffic (default value Unstructured) and alter it to suit
your requirements as necessary.
Port Configuration details can be viewed on a selected card type basis. Available
options depend on the type of card selected: 1.5, 2, 34, 45,140Mbit/s.
Note: Port configuration is not available if the connection is locked - see Set Admin
State on page 211.
Cross-Connection Details screen > Port > Port Configuration > Port
Configuration screen > Port > Port Configuration

Details screen.
2 Select the appropriate tributary card from the Source Card box to display the
cross-connection details screen for that card. The screen presents a list of
current cross-connections.
3 Select an existing tributary connection to gain access to the port option from the
Cross-Connection Details screen.
4 Select Port > Port Configuration from the Cross-Connection Details screen to
access the Port Configuration window.
5 Select Port > Port Config (see) to access the Port Configuration screen in
Figure 13-52.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Figure 13-52: Port Configuration
· The screen shows the mapping state, enabled/disabled state of

Consequential Actions (default should be set to disabled) and the Input
SD Config thresholds, which depend on the type of card selected (1.5,
2, 34, 45 or 140Mbit/s).
Note: The screen in Figure 13-52 shows a 45Mbit/s tributary. For other
tributaries such as 34Mbit/s and 140Mbit/s for instance, the screen
details will vary. On 1.5Mbit/s tributaries, only unstructured framing
should be selected.
Note: When 2M NT Mode is enabled at the LCT as a remote diagnostic aid

(from the System X Exchange End), it allows the PDH signalling
information carried in Timeslot 0 to be looped back via the ASIC at the
2Mbit/s level.
Note: When this condition is enabled and the NT1 loopbacks are applied,
then they will override any previously set-up 2Mbit/s loopbacks. This
feature should not be enabled/applied without gaining the approval of
the Network Controller.
6 Change the settings as required for the card type (Structured or Unstructured)
· Framing: Unstructured or Structured
· Mapping:
- For 2M this is either Asynchronous or Floating TU Byte

Synchronous
- For 34M, this is fixed to 34M Asynchronous

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
- For 34M Transmux, this is fixed to Transmultiplexing
· Consequential Actions: Enabled or Disabled (the default is Disabled)
· Port EBER: Enabled or Disabled (the default is Enabled)
· 2M Operation: NT Mode, LT Mode and Disabled (the default is NT/LT

Disabled)
-5 -6 -9
· SD Config: Disabled, 10 , 10 , etc. to 10 and USE/CDEG (the
default is USE)
· USE/CDEG Threshold On: 1-20 (the default is 5)
· USE/CDEG Threshold Off: 1-20 (the default is 10).
period.
8 Select Cancel to return to the Port Configuration screen.
9 Select Close from the File menu in the Port Configuration screen to return to
the Cross-Connection Details screen.
Note: Once a port is selected from the Port Configuration screen then it can
be cross-connected, protected, amended and deleted, etc. as
necessary see Create/Amend Port Protection on page 256and Delete
Port Protection on page 258 for details.
Note: Do not attempt to delete the port protection connection from the
Cross-connections window. Port protection connections should be
deleted from the Port Config window.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Connected Port Configuration (LO Path Trace Config)

You can independently configure the transmitted and expected lower order path trace
ID on a per port basis. This feature can only be effected after a PDH cross-connection
for that port has been configured. All operations are performed on a slot/card basis.
The path trace ID consists of a fifteen-byte string of ASCII characters. Path trace
identities cannot be set for STM-n tributary cards.
Configuration screen > Port > Connected Port Configuration

Details screen.
2 Select the card, on which the cross-connection exists, from the Source Card box
to display the cross-connection details for that card. The screen presents a list
of current cross-connections.
3 Make sure that the port from which the cross-connection originates is shown as
connected.
4 Select an existing tributary connection to gain access to the port option from the
5 Select Port Configuration from the path shown to access the Port
Configuration window.
Figure 13-53: Selecting Connected Port Configuration
6 Select the required port in the window and Connected Port Config from the path
shown to access the Connected Port Config screen (see Figure 13-54).

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Figure 13-54: Connected Port Configuration
Note: It may be necessary to move the Port Config window to reveal the
Cross-Connections window to identify the connected port's
destination.
7 Change the field settings as required. The possible field entries are shown
below:
Note: To avoid a temporary mismatch and possible burst of AIS when

altering a Tandem Trace ID:
Disable the TC (Tandem Connection) equipping and apply the disable

condition
Disable the path trace and apply the disable condition
Alter the ID and apply the alterations
Enable the path trace and apply the enable condition
Enable the TC equipping and apply the enable condition.
· Transmitted Path Trace/Transmitted TC Trace IDs: 15byte ASCII string
· Expected Path Trace/Expected TC Path Trace: Enabled or Disabled

(the default is Disabled); when enabled you can set the Expected Path
Trace/Expected TC Trace IDs: 15byte ASCII string
-5 -6 -9
· SD Mechanism: Disabled, 10 , 10 , etc. to 10 and USE/CDEG (the
default is USE)

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
· TC SD Mechanism: Disabled, USE/CDEG (the default is USE)
· USE/CDEG On Threshold: 1-20 (the default is 5)
· USE/CDEG Off Threshold: 1-20 (the default is 10)
threshold.
· Path EBER: Enabled or Disabled (the default is Enabled)
· Expected TC Equipping: Equipped or Unequipped (the default is

Unequipped)
10 Select Close from the File menu in the Port Configuration screen to return to the
be protected, amended and deleted, etc. as necessary see
Create/Amend Port Protection on page 256 and Delete Port Protection
Note: Do not attempt to delete a Port Protection from the Cross-

connections window. Port protection should only be deleted from the
Port Config window.
2M Output Buffer Timing Configuration

On selection of a 2Mbit/s tributary card, the re-timing of buffer modes can be effected.
These modes permit synchronous and plesiochronous 2Mbit/s transport via Marconi
SDH equipment without suffering the usual consequences of pointer adjustments on
output wander.
You can select a specific port configured for asynchronous mapping, and configure the
synchronisation of the 2Mbit/s output at any given time from the Cross-Connection
Details screen. Port Configuration details can then be viewed and altered on a per card
type basis.
See associated SMA1/4UC product manual (Synchronisation) for a detailed technical

description.
Note: 2M Output Buffer Timing Configuration is not available if the connection is

locked - see Set Admin State on page 211.
Configuration screen > Port > 2M Output Buffer Timing Configuration

Details screen.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
2 Select a 2Mbit/s tributary card from the Source Card box to display the cross-
connection details for that card. The screen presents a list of current cross-
connections.
3 Select the required tributary connection in the Cross-Connection Details

screen.
4 Select Port Config from the path shown to access the Port Configuration
screen (see Figure 13-55).
Figure 13-55: Select 2M Output Timing Buffer Config
5 Select the required connection port number and 2M Output Timing Buffer Config
to access the 2M Output Timing Buffer Config screen (see Figure 13-56). The
screen shows the 2Mbit/s Output Timing field.
Figure 13-56: 2M Output Timing Buffer Configuration
6 Select the Output Timing mode required (Normal Timing, Synchronous Data
Channel or Plesiochronous Channel Timing Buffer, Synchronous Channel
Timing Buffer or Wander Buffer).

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Note: If you select Wander Buffer, then configure the Wander Timing Source;
see Wander Buffer Synchronisation Source on page 251.
necessary - see Create/Amend Port Protection on page 256 and
Delete Port Protection on page 258 for details.
Note: Do not attempt to delete a Port Protection from the Cross-

connections window. Port protection should only be deleted from the
Port Config window.
Wander Buffer Synchronisation Source

On selection of a 2Mbit/s tributary card, the re-timing of buffer modes can be effected.
These modes permit synchronous and plesiochronous 2Mbit/s transport via Marconi
SDH equipment without suffering the usual consequences of pointer adjustments on
wander.
You can set-up a specific port at any given time from the Cross-Connection Details
screen as a synchronisation source (wander buffer synchronisation source). Port
configuration details can then be viewed and altered on a per card type basis.
See the associated SMA1/4UC product manual (Synchronisation) for a detailed

technical description.
Configuration screen > Port > Wander Buffer Sync Source

Details screen.
2 Select a 2Mbit/s tributary card from the Source Card box to display the Cross-
Connection Details screen for that card.
3 Select the required tributary connection.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Figure 13-57: Selecting Wander Buffer Sync Source
5 Select the required connection and Wander Buffer Sync Source to access the
Wander Buffer Sync Source screen (see Figure 13-58). The screen shows the
2Mbit/s Wander Buffer Sync Source field.
Figure 13-58: Wander Buffer Synchronisation Source
6 Select a 2M tributary port as required.
be protected, amended and deleted, etc. as necessary see
Create/Amend Port Protection on page 256 and Delete Port Protection
Note: Do not attempt to delete Port Protection from the Cross-connections

window. Port protection should only be deleted from the Port Config
window.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
CRC-4 Monitoring
Use this function to enable/disable CRC-4 Monitoring on a per port basis once you have
selected a 2Mbit/s tributary card with its ports set for structured signals.

Note: CRC-4 monitoring is not available if the connection is locked - see Set Admin
State on page 211.
Configuration screen > Port > CRC-4 Monitoring

Details screen.
cross-connections.

screen.
screen.
Figure 13-59: Selecting CRC-4 Monitoring
5 Select the required connection port number and CRC-4 Monitoring to access
the CRC-4 Monitoring status screen (see Figure 13-60: CRC-4 Monitoring).
The screen shows the current state of CRC-4 Monitoring, (Enabled or Disabled).

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Note: When Disabled, the FAW is monitored and the configuration also
determines error rate alarm calculations/performance monitoring.
Figure 13-60: CRC-4 Monitoring
6 Change the port monitoring state as required (Enabled or Disabled).
necessary - see Create/Amend Port Protection on page 256 and
Delete Port Protection on page 258 for details.
Note: Do not attempt to delete a port protection from the Cross-connections

window. Port protection should only be deleted from the Port Config
window.
CRC-4 Insertion
Use this function to enable/disable CRC-4 Insertion on a per port basis once you have
selected a 2Mbit/s tributary card with its ports set for structured signals.
Note: CRC-4 insertion is not available if the connection is locked - see Set Admin
State on page 211.

Configuration screen > Port > CRC-4 Insertion

Details screen.
cross-connections.

screen.
screen.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Figure 13-61: Port Configuration
Note: Select the required connection port number and CRC-4 Insertion to
access the CRC-4 Insertion status screen (see Figure 13-62). The
screen shows the current state of CRC-4 Insertion (Enabled or
Disabled).
Note: When Disabled, the FAW is monitored and the configuration also
determines error rate alarm calculations/performance monitoring.
Figure 13-62: CRC-4 Insertion
5 Select the port insertion state as required (Enabled or Disabled).
Note: Once a port is selected from the Port Configuration screen then it can be
cross-connected, protected, amended and deleted, etc. as necessary - see
Connections Menu and Delete Port Protection for details.
Note: Do not attempt to delete a port protection from the Cross-connections window.
Port protection should only be deleted from the Port Config window.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Create/Amend Port Protection

Use this function to create and amend Port Protection. This section describes the create
function, but the amend procedure is similar and so it applies equally to both functions.
Port Protection allows the VC-12 (2Mbit/s), VC-3 (34/45Mbit/s) and VC-4 (140Mbit/s)
path to be protected by a duplicate path provided by way of a second Line.
Configuration screen > Port > Create/Amend Port Protection

Details screen.
2 Select an appropriate tributary card from the Source Card box to display a list of
current cross-connections.

screen.
screen.
Figure 13-63: Selecting Create Port Protection
5 Select the source card in the Source Card box, then select the destination in the
Destination Card box, and finally select the port connections in the lists shown
for the source and destination cards.
6 Once the ports are selected, then select Create or Amend from the path shown
(one option may be greyed out).
7 This displays the screen shown in Figure 13-64 creating/amending Port

Protection. The screen shows the initial port protection state of the selected
card.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Figure 13-64: Create Port Protection
8 Amend the entries as follows:
· Mode: Revertive or Non-Revertive.
- Revertive: When a failed port recovers, traffic is automatically

switched back to the original worker (with possible disturbance to
traffic).
- Non-Revertive: When a failed worker port recovers there is no

automatic switching from the protection to the worker thereby
avoiding any unnecessary disturbance to traffic.
Note: When Revertive Protection is invoked, a Wait to Restore (WTR) period

of at least 1 minute should be set to avoid chattering.
· Operator Command: Clear, Force Switch to Worker, Force Switch to

Protection, Manual Switch to Worker, Manual Switch to Protection.
- Clear: Clears any operator entered command (except Swap

Worker/Protection Designation) and also clears any active wait to
restore (WTR) states. If a WTR state is cleared, the associated
protection group immediately reverts to worker.

continue to be selected from the designated worker port.
Note: The Force To Worker command has a higher priority than
locally detected failures on the worker port and hence traffic
remains selected from the worker regardless of any failure
indications on the worker.
- Force Switch To Protection: Causes traffic to be selected from, or

continue to be selected from the designated protection port

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Note: The Force Switch To Protection command has a higher priority than
locally-detected failures on the protection port and hence traffic
remains selected from the protection port regardless of any failure
indications on the protection.

continue to be selected from the designated worker port unless a
worker port (SF and SD) have a higher priority than this manual
switch command.
- Manual Switch To Protection: Causes traffic to be selected from, or

continue to be selected from the designated protection port unless
a higher priority switch state is in effect. This manual switch
Delete Port Protection

Use this function to delete Port Protection on a 2/34/45/140Mbit/s tributary card.
Note: Do not attempt to delete port protection from the Cross-connections window.
Port protection should only be deleted from the Port Config window.
Configuration screen > Port > Delete Port Protection

Details screen.
2 Select the appropriate tributary card from the Source Card box to display the
cross-connection details for that card. The screen presents a list of current
cross-connections.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Figure 13-65: Selecting Delete Port Protection
4 Select the source card in the Source Card box, then select the destination in the
Destination Card box, and finally select the port connections in the lists shown
for the source and destination cards.
5 Select Delete Port Protection to display a Question box.
6 Select Yes to delete protection from the selected card and return to the Port
Configuration screen. This action sends data to the Comms/Controller Card.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Blank Page

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Chapter 14:
Performance Menu
Figure 14-1: Performance Menu
Set 24 Hour End Time

When Performance Reporting is enabled performance reports covering 15-minute and
24-hour periods are monitored. (See Card Performance Reports on page 209.)
Use this function to set the 24-hour end time as required to a value within 15-minute
steps. Monitoring will begin 24 hours before this end time and will end at the selected
time. For example, if the current time is 06:00 and you set this end time to 07:15,
monitoring will begin at 07:15 today and stop at 07:15 tomorrow.
The field covers a normal 24-hour clock period 00:00 to 24:00.
CAUTION!
WE RECOMMEND THAT YOU DO NOT ALTER THE SYSTEM CLOCK DURING THE
COMPILATION OF PERFORMANCE MONITORING REPORTS.
Path: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window > Performance > Set 24 Hour End
Time
1 Select Set 24-Hour End from the path shown to display the Set 24-Hour End
Time screen which shows the current 24-Hour Period End Time.
Figure 14-2: Set 24-hour End Time
2 Change the end time as required.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
3 Select OK to send data to the Comms/Controller Card, which responds with a

message, stating that the duration of current reports will be invalidated when the
24-Hour end time is altered.
4 To change the 24-Hour End Time, select OK in the message box. This returns
you to the Set 24-Hour End Time screen which shows the new 24-hour end
time.
5 Select Cancel to exit the screen back to the Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC
window.
Clear Performance Reports

There are three Clear functions, but they all operate in the same way and are thus
covered together in this section:
· Clear Current 15-minute Records
· Clear Current 24-hour Records
· Clear All Records
Use the appropriate function to clear records of the required type. The Clear All
Records function clears all current 15-minute and 24-hour records together.
Path: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window > Performance > Clear > Current
15 Min/24 Hour/All Records
1 Select Clear and the required type of records from the path shown. This
displays an appropriate Warning screen. Figure 14-3 shows the warning for
clearing 15-minute reports.
Figure 14-3: Confirm Clearance
2 To clear the reports, select OK, else select Cancel. In either case, you are
returned to the Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Performance Thresholds
Performance Thresholds are associated with monitoring the performance of the overall
equipment. They can be either globally set on a per-system basis, or individually set as
required.
You can display and amend the thresholds through the Performance Thresholds
screen. Reports will be generated when the respective thresholds are exceeded.
Path: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window > Performance > Thresholds >
Performance Thresholds
1 Select Performance Thresholds from the path shown to display the

Performance Thresholds screen, which shows the current threshold event
report values.
Figure 14-4: Performance Thresholds
2 Select the required threshold and amend its value in the Modify Threshold field
as required.
Default Performance Thresholds

Use this function to set the performance thresholds to the default values held on the
Comms/Controller card.
Default Thresholds
1 Select Default Thresholds from the path shown to display a Question box,
which asks for confirmation.
2 Select Yes to set the performance thresholds to their default values.
3 You are warned that this will reset All threshold values on cards ports and paths
to their default values. If you wish to continue, select OK to set the defaults and

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Synchronisation Thresholds
Synchronisation Event Report Thresholds are associated with the performance of the
overall equipment. They can be either globally set on a per system basis, or individually
as required.
Use this function to display and amend the current synchronisation event report
thresholds for the equipment.
Synchronisation
1 Select Synchronisation from the path shown to display the Synchronisation

Thresholds screen, showing the current threshold values.
2 Select the required threshold and amend its value in the Modify Threshold field
as required.
CSES Performance Report Thresholds

CSES (Consecutive Severely Errored Seconds) Performance Thresholds are
associated with monitoring the performance of the overall equipment. They can be
either globally set or individually set as required.
Use this function to display and amend the current performance event report thresholds
for the equipment.
Note: All CSES Reports (e.g. RS Near End CSES) can have their threshold levels set
between 1-9, with a default value of 5.
CSES
1 Select CSES from the path shown to display the CSES Thresholds screen,
showing the current threshold values.
2 Select the required threshold and amend its value in the Modify Threshold field.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Trib Input SES Thresholds

Trib Input SES (Severely Errored Seconds Count) Performance Thresholds are
associated with the monitoring of the overall equipment performance. They can be
either globally set on a per system basis, or individually set as required.
Once established, you can display and alter the current performance event report
thresholds for the equipment.
Trib Input SES Thresholds
1 Select Trib Input SES Thresholds from the path shown to display the Trib Input
SES Thresholds screen, showing the current threshold values.
2 Select the required threshold and amend its value in the Modify Threshold field.
Scheduled Reporting Delay State

Scheduled Reporting Delay States are implemented when there is a possibility of
communications system overload. This is more likely to occur in large networks.
Delaying allows you to delay the sending of scheduled reports. Each NE in a network
should have its delay set to a different value to maximise the probability that all NEs
within a network send reports at different times.
Once established, the default delay state can be enabled or disabled. The delay value
may be displayed and amended as required.
Note: The default delay period mentioned in this text (417 seconds) is included for
completeness. It will vary between equipment, as the Comms/Controller
generates it in a pseudo-random manner within the range of 0-889 seconds,
with 1-second granularity.
Path: Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC window > Performance > Scheduled
Reporting Delays
1 Select Scheduled Reporting Delays to access the Scheduled Reporting Delay

States screen. This screen shows the current delay state.
2 Select Default or Configurable as required. If you select Configurable, then you

can set the Reporting Delay value to between 0-889 seconds.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Blank Page

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Release 3.1 NE Configuration
Chapter 15:
NE Configuration
15.1 Initial Configuration
Initial configuration of the SMA1/4UC is carried out using the Commissioning facility on
the LCT.
The shelf and cards should be logically configured and brought to the operational state
by use of the LCT (Refer to the LCT Operator Manual for the correct procedure).
Configuration can be carried out remotely from any other SMA1/4UC element on the
same network (provided the Core A Card has previously been commissioned locally).
Note: During commissioning the Sync Mode defaults to Free-run.
Note: The Core A Card must be initially configured in order to recognise the presence
of cards in the shelf. If a card is being configured with the Core A card in the Off-
line state, then a ‘card missing’ message will be displayed, even if the card is
present in the shelf. The Core A Card is brought ‘on-line’ at the end of
Commissioning by bringing the NE ‘on-line’.
To carry out initial configuration, carry out the following procedure:
1 Connect the LCT to the SMA1/4UC. The Welcome screen should indicate that
the SMA1/4UC type is a SMA-1/4 Ultra Compact, and the Controller state is
Off-Line and Uncommissioned. The Communications state may also be
Uncommissioned.
2 From the Welcome screen menu select Commission then the Comms option to
display the Login screen. Login using ADMIN (use upper case) as the User
Name and enter the current password. (SDHMUXES)
3 Either enter the settings provided by the Network Planner on the Transport
Layer screen or accept the defaults. Select Apply followed by Continue, when
it becomes available, to display the Gateway Interface Configuration screen.
4 If the SMA1/4UC being configured is NOT a Gateway, select NONE for

Gateway Interface Type. Select Apply followed by Continue, when it becomes
available, to display the Network Layer Configuration screen. You may get the
Qualifier Window, with the message Comms Card Missing (because the NE is
Offline). OK this message.
Or,
If the SMA1/4UC being configured is a Gateway select the appropriate

Gateway Interface Type (e.g. Ethernet AUI).
Then enter the NE Ethernet MAC addresses as per the Network Planner’s
instructions. Confirm that the details are correct then select Apply then
Continue, when it becomes available, to display the Network Layer
Configuration screen. (OK the Qualifier screen) Card Missing if it appears.
5 On the Network Layer Configuration screen, change the System ID length to

6, then enter the System ID address & the Manual Area Address (NSAP).
Change the NPDU Lifetime Control to the Customer’s requirements or accept

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
the default. Set the Mode (Routing Table) to Level 1 for Non-Gateway NE and
Level 2 for a Gateway NE.
6 Select Apply then Continue, when it becomes available, to display the

Welcome screen which should indicate the Comms State as Commissioned. OK
the Qualifier window if it appears.
7 From the Welcome screen menu select Commission then the Mux Controller
option. Login using ADMIN (use upper case) as the User Name and enter the
current password.
8 You will now get the option to Set Commissioning Parameters, set these as per
the customers requirements. The default options are:-
9 TCM Mode = Pseudo TCM (The other option is True TCM).
10 Trib Input Mode = Card (The other option is Xconn).
11 Then select Apply then Continue.
12 In the Commissioning screen the Core A card modules will be displayed as

configured (ie. Comms, Ctnl, & Switch). Select in turn the position into which
each card is to be inserted, and from the resulting menu select the Configure or
Adopt option.
Note: The Adopt function will adopt the card already fitted, & will immediately
show (if suitable) the card in the slot.
13 Repeat this process of selecting each card or module interface in turn, selecting
the Configure/Adopt state, & selecting the correct traffic type (if applicable) until
the desired shelf configuration is complete.
14 When all cards have been configured on the LCT select Apply then OK the
qualifier screen. (The Qualifier window will display all the cards that have just
been configured). Select Continue, when it becomes available.
15 The Mux Controller will perform a configuration and initialisation routine, on

completion of which a Report Received message will be received and the
Controller Status will change to Commissioned on the Welcome screen.
16 Wait until the Mux Controller led (amber LED) on Core A has ceased flashing
and is permanently lit before continuing.
15.2 SMC Bank Status

On a new SMA1/4UC the partitions of both SMC banks will be set to Inhibited and need
to be set such that SMC-1 partitions are Current and those for SMC-2 are Non-Current.
The procedure, which should be carried out BEFORE setting the NE On Line, is as
follows:
Note: Some partitions on a new SMA1/4UC may be set to Empty. These cannot be re-
set.
1 From the Welcome screen menu select File then, from the resulting menu, the
Login option. Login using ADMIN (use upper case) as the User Name and enter
the current password to display the Top Level screen.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
The LCT main screen will be displayed. the following diagram is an example
only:-
The above diagram is an example only
2 Select the Mux Controller on the Core A card, and then using the mouse Right
Click over the card, then from the resulting menu, select SMC option then Bank
Status.
3 Select, in turn, each card partition from the list displayed then, from the on
screen menu, select Global and from the resulting menu select Set Bank Status
and select the OK qualifier at the end.
4 On the Set Bank Status screen set the status of SMC-1 to Current and SMC-2
to Non-Current for each Generic card type. Then select OK & Close, to return to
the Bank Status screen.
5 When all partitions have been set select File then Close from the Bank Status
screen, to return to the Top Level screen.
15.3 Synchronisation
For initial commissioning the SMA1/4UC Sync mode needs to be free running which is
the default settings but should be confirmed as follows:-
1 Via the Configuration option from the Top Level menu select Sync then SETG
Sync Mode. Confirm that the SETG Sync Mode option is set to Free running.
All other options should be left at the defaults.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
2 Select Apply then select Cancel to return to the Top Level screen. Wait until
the 3rd LED down on the Mux Controller has ceased flashing and is
permanently lit before continuing.
15.4 Core Line Card Sync–Destination ID Configuration

When commissioning the SMA1/4UC, the Core Line cards must have a unique
description entered into the Destination ID field. Otherwise SSMB operation does not
operate correctly. The following steps detail this process:-
From the top level menu:-
1 Select: Connections®Connections, to go to the Cross-Connections Details

screen.
From the Cross-Connections Details screen:-
2 Select: Source Card field & choose line module Core A Line East (for
example).
3 Select: Card®Section Config, to go to the Section Config screen.
4 From the Section Config screen, select the Synchronisation tab.
In the Synchronisation screen:-
5 Leave the Fixed SSMB option set to Disabled (Default)
The SSMB value field will display value 1111 (Default)
6 In the Destination ID field enter Core A Line East (for example)
7 Select the Apply button, then Cancel to revert back to the Cross-Connection
Details screen.
8 Repeat steps as appropriate, for the other Core Line module(s) fitted.
e.g. Core A Line West
Protection Core Line East
Protection Core Line West
From the Cross-Connection Details screen:-
9 Select File then Close, to revert back to the top-level screen.
15.5 Disable Fault Action for PDH Trib Input AIS

Unless specified otherwise by the Customer the Fault Action on receipt of AIS at a PDH
Tributary I/P should be UNSELECTED as follows:-
1 From the Top Level menu select the Fault Management option.
2 Select Fault Detectors then Fault Action from the resulting menus to display the
Fault Action screen.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
3 If any fault actions are set i.e. Data-AIS or RAI (indicated by a Tick) for Trib
Input AIS within the PDH Ports area of the screen then they should be
deselected.
4 Confirm that no actions are selected for Trib Input AIS then select Apply then
Cancel to return to the Top Level screen.
15.6 Disable Diagnostic Reset Function

Unless specified otherwise by the Customer, the Diagnostic Reset function should be
set to DISABLED (This can only be done via the LCT) as follows:-
1 From the Top Level menu select the Configuration option then Diagnostic Reset
to display the Diagnostic Reset screen.
2 Ensure the following are deselected Loopback PRBS Injection Error Injection
3 Ensure that Automatic Reset is set to Disabled then Apply. Select Cancel to
return to the Top Level screen.
15.7 Real Time Clock

From the Top Level menu:
1 Select Configuration→Date and Time
2 Set the shelf to the current date and time.
3 Once it has been set OK the changes to quit the screen.
4 Select Cancel to return to the Top Level screen.
15.8 Set NE On Line

1 From the Top Level menu select Status then the Set NE On/Off Line option.
2 Check that the Set NE on-line option is selected.
3 Select OK & OK again to confirm, & return to the Top Level screen.
4 It could take several minutes to bring the NE on-line, this will depend on the
card complement. Completion is indicated when, the Mux Controller (MC)
Amber led on the Core A card stops flashing, and the Amber led on other
equipped cards are permanently ON.
15.9 Unit Software Inventory

Carry out a software inventory of each unit in the SMA1/4UC shelf and confirm that the
software codes are correct for the SMA1/4UC Release/Revision of the equipment
supplied to the contract as advised by the appropriate Marconi Communications
Business Unit. This can be carried out by selecting, each card in turn and selecting
Inventory then Software Inventory.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Blank Page

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Release 3.1 Functional Checks at SMA1/4UC Nodes
Chapter 16:
Functional Checks At SMA1/4UC Nodes
Carry out the following tests on each SMA1/4UC PRIOR to it being connected into the
network.
16.1 Optical Launch Power

1 For ALL equipped Optical Interface cards connect an optical power meter to the
transmit port of the Optical STM-n card under test, via a single mode test lead.
2 Operate the upper switch on the Optical STM-n card front for at least 12
seconds. This will energise the laser for 90 seconds.
3 Confirm the launch level from the card under test is within the limits below.
Table 16-1: Units Wavelength. ID and Launch Power

LAUNCH POWER
UNIT DESCRIPTION WAVELENGTH ID
RANGE
STM-1 I-1.1
1310 nm -8.0 to –15.0 dBm
Intra-Office/Short Haul DFW S-1.1
STM-1 1310 nm L-1.1

0 to –5.0 dBm
Long Haul DFW 1550 nm L-1.2
1310Tx/1310Rx
L-1.1
1310Tx/1550Rx
STM-1
1550Tx/1310Rx 0 to –3.0 dBm
Long Haul SFW
1536 nm RED L-1.2
1554 nm BLUE
STM-4 I-4.1
1310 nm -8.0 to –15.0 dBm
Intra-Office/Short Haul DFW S-4.1
L-4.1
1310 nm
STM-4 L-4.1+
+2.0 to –3.0 dBm
Long Haul DFW L-4.2
1550 nm
L-4.2+
16.2 Alarms
16.2.1 Alarm CLEAR Check

1 Loop the Optical Output and Input ports of all equipped Optical STM-n cards
using suitable single mode optical test leads.
Note: Attenuated test leads are NOT required to loop back Optical STM-1
1310/1550nm, or STM-4 1310nm cards. They ARE required for STM-4

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
1550nm cards. A test lead with an attenuation of approximately 10 dB

will be suitable for any card.
2 Loop the STM-1 Output and Input of all equipped STM-1 Electrical Mux cards.
3 The only alarms present on the SMA1/4UC should be those expected at this
stage.
16.2.2 Expected Alarms
16.2.2.1 PDH Core & Generic Tributary Cards

For each 2, 34, & 45 Mbit/s Tributary Card fitted, the Port X Trib Input Loss of Signal
alarms will be displayed - where X is the number of each port to which traffic has not be
applied. These alarms should NOT be amended at this stage.
Note: The Port X Trib Input Loss of Signal alarms will not be raised if the shelf is
commissioned with Trib input mode of Xconn.
16.2.2.2 Mux Controller Card

If a Real Time Clock Not Set alarm appears on the Mux Controller Card. It should be
cleared using the Date And Time facility on the LCT, which is available via the
Configure option on the Top-Level screen menu.
Historic Alarm/Event Log Threshold Exceedence alarms may be present and can be
cleared by selecting Clear_log the event logs via the LCT. I.e. From the Main menu
select Fault Management®NE Event Logs®Historical Alarms®All
An EM Comms Link Fail alarm may also be present. This will clear when
communication with MV-36 is established.
16.2.2.3 Comms Card

A series of DCCm/DCCr LAPD Fail alarms for STM-1/4 cards will be displayed. The
number of alarms reported depends upon the configuration of the shelf and may be
reported for:-
· Line West Core/Protection
· Line East Core/Protection
· Tributary Positions S_01/S_02
16.3 Cross Connections to Line West/Line East

THE CROSS-CONNECTIONS REQUIRED WILL DEPEND ON THE SET-UP TO BE
USED FOR THE ERROR FREE CHECK TEST, REFER TO 16.5
1 From the LCT Top Level menu select Connections then the appropriate tributary
card, from the resulting list, to display the Cross Connection Details screen.
2 Select Port 1 on the source Trib card e.g. Core A Trib1, then display the
Destination Card selection field from which select Line West then its Port 1.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Note: If agreeable with the Customer, the Tributaries may be cross

connected back on themselves, instead of to Line West, by selecting
the Source card as the Destination card and selecting the same port.
3 Select Path from the Cross Connection Details screen menu then the Create
Cross Connection and Point to Point options.
4 Select a Traffic Type of VC-12 (2Mbit/s card and 34Mbit/s Transmux card), VC-
3 (34/45 Mbit/s Cards), or VC-4 (140 Mbit/s/STM-1/STM-4 Cards) then OK to
create the cross connection.
5 Repeat for all remaining ports of the same Tributary.
6 If a second Tributary of the same type is to be tested and a Line East Interface
is present repeat but making cross connections from Line East instead of Line
West.
Note: If no Line East interface is present, make further cross connections to

Line West if available bandwidth exists.
7 If further Tributary cards are to be tested repeat dividing the VC-n connections
equally between Line East (if fitted) and Line West.
8 Return to the Top Level by selecting Window from the Cross Connection
Details screen menu then selecting Close.
16.4 Viewing/Clearing the Event Logs

1 From the LCT Top Level menu, select Fault Management then select the NE
Event Logs option from the resulting menu.
2 Select Historic Status then All from the sub menus to view the log. Selecting the
Clear _Log option will clear the log. Confirm the request by selecting Yes in the
message box displayed.
3 View and clear if necessary the Historic Alarm log in a similar manner.
16.5 Loss of Signal Alarm and Error Free Check

The test set-up will depend on the equipping of the SMA1/4UC under test and the
number of Tributaries fitted. A number of possible methods are described in 16.5.1 to
16.5.7. Numerous other permutations are possible, use the sections as indicated below:
Unbalanced Terminations.
CABLING BETWEEN THE DDF AND THE SUBRACK SHOULD BE INCLUDED AS
PART OF THE EQUIPMENT SET UP FOR THIS TEST (WHERE APPLICABLE).
1 Ensure that Line West and Line East are looped back on themselves via
suitable test cables.
2 Using the procedure described in 16.3 create cross connections from Core A
Trib1 to Line West, and from Core A Trib2 to Line East (if fitted) for all 64 x 2M
Core Trib ports.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
3 To ensure that no cable reversals exits the following test should be carried out
sequentially until all ports are connected in tandem.
4 Apply an appropriate test signal to Port 1 I/P of Core A Trib1 which is cross-
connected to Line West/East, i.e.:-
2048 Kbit/s HDB3 2^15-1 PRBS for 2Mbit/s cards.
34/45 Mbit/s HDB3 2^23-1 PRBS for 34/45Mbit/s cards.
5 View the Active Alarms for the Tributary under test and confirm that the
appropriate Port Loss of Input alarm has cleared.
6 Ensure an error free PRBS signal is present on the same Port O/P then loop the
O/P to the adjacent Port I/P (if applicable).
7 Loop the O/P of Core A Trib1 port 32 to the adjacent Core A Trib2 port1 I/P.
8 Repeat until all Port O/Ps and I/Ps of Core A Trib1/Trib2 are connected in
tandem and an error free PRBS signal is present at Core A Trib2 port 32 O/P.
9 Clear the Event Logs (as in 16.4)
10 Clear the Event Logs, and then GENTLY agitate each cable at its connection
point at the DDF and at the equipment face. Also GENTLY tap each unit
(including LTUs) in the shelf. No induced alarms or errors shall be recorded in
either case. Confirm by interrogating the Event Logs.
Balanced Terminations.
Note: The Cabling Between the 24 Port RJ45 Patch Panel Interface & The Subrack
Should Be Included As Part Of The Equipment Set Up For This Test.
1 Create cross connections as described in Section 16.3 on the 2Mb/s

Unbalanced Tributary(s) being tested that are connected to each 24 Port RJ45
Patch Panel as follows:
· Port 1 to Port 2
· Port 3 to Port 4
· Port 5 to Port 6
· Port 7 to Port 8
· Port 9 to Port 10

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
2 Connect a Balun connector (that converts RJ45 to Type 43) to Port 1 of the
patch panel, using a CAT5 2 pair cross-over cable.
3 Connect a 2Mb/s PDH Traffic Generator/Analyser to the Balun connector using

suitable coax test cables.
4 Apply an appropriate test signal to Port 1 I/P of Core A Trib1, that is connected
to Patch Panel port 1. i.e.:-
16.5.3 2048 Kbit/s HDB3 2^15-1 PRBS for 2Mbit/s Trib cards.
1 Connect a second Balun connector (that converts RJ45 to Type 43) to Port 2 of
the patch panel, using a CAT5 2 pair cross-over cable. The Tx & Rx connectors
at the Type 43 end of the balun is looped back with a 75W U-Link.
2 Ensure an error free PRBS signal is received by the Traffic Analyser.
3 View the Active Alarms for the Tributary under test and confirm that Ports 1 & 2
Loss of Input alarms have cleared.
Note: To ensure that no cable reversals exits the following steps should be
carried out sequentially until all ports on the patch panel are connected
in tandem, externally by CAT5 test cables & internally by Cross
Connections.
4 Disconnect the second Balun connector from Port 2 & connect it to Port 4 of the
patch panel
5 Connect Port 2 & Port 3 of the patch panel together, using a CAT5 2 pair cross-
over cable.
6 Repeat & for Ports 3 & 4.
7 With reference to Figure 4.1, repeat moving down the Patch Panel sequentially,
until all 24 Port O/Ps and I/Ps of the patch panel/Tributary card are connected in
tandem.
8 Verify that an error free PRBS signal is present at the Traffic Analyser that is still
connected to Port 1 of the patch panel. And confirm that all Loss of Input
alarms have cleared for all 24 ports at the Patch Panel being tested.
9 Clear the Event Logs then GENTLY agitate each cable at its connection point at
the Patch Panel and at the equipment face. Also GENTLY tap each unit
(including LTUs) in the shelf. No induced alarms or errors shall be recorded in
either case. Confirm by interrogating the Event Logs.
10 Repeat all of the above steps for other Core A Trib1 & Core A Trib2 2Mb/s ports
that are connected to any other 24 x RJ45 Patch Panels.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Figure 16-1: 2Mb/s 120W Balanced Tributary Test At RJ45 Patch Panel
24 x Port RJ45
Patch Panel
2 Mb/s Balun Connector
Generator/
Analyser
RJ45 - Type 43 Converter
5102913-0013
1
2
3
75W Coax 4
Test Leads
5
6
7
8
9
Key 10
Software Cross Connection
11
“CAT 5” 2 Pair Cross-over Cable
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
75W U-Link 20
10A HD Type 43 21
055-181-9129AZO
22
Balun Connector 23
RJ45 - Type 43 Converter
5102913-0013
24

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
16.5.4 Testing an STM-1 Tributary

Note: Use an STM-1 Analyser.
1 Using the procedure in Section 16.3 cross connect all ports of the STM-1
Tributary under test to Line West or Line East at the VC-4 level.
2 With Line West and Line East looped back on themselves, via suitable test
cables, apply an STM-1 SIGNAL with the VC-4 containing 140 Mbit/s CMI 2^23-
1 PRBS, to Port#1 I/P of the STM-1 Tributary card under test.
3 View the Active Alarms for the Tributary under test and confirm that the
4 Confirm an error free PRBS signal is present on the same Port O/P, then loop
the O/P to the adjacent Port I/P (if applicable).
5 Repeat until all Port O/Ps and I/Ps of the Tributary card are connected in
tandem and an error free PRBS signal is present at the final port O/P.
6 To include other Tributary cards of the same type connected to Line West/East
in the monitored loop, connect the last port O/P of the preceding card to Port 1
I/P of the next. Repeat as necessary.
the DDF and at the equipment face. Also GENTLY tap each unit in the shelf. No
induced alarms or errors shall be recorded in either case. Confirm by
interrogating the Event Logs.
16.5.5 Testing an STM-4 Tributary

Note: Use an STM-4 Analyser.
1 Using the procedure in Section 16.3 cross connect all ports of the STM-4
Tributary under test to Line West or Line East at the VC-4 level.
2 With Line West and Line East looped back, via suitable test cables, apply an
STM-1 signal with the VC-4 for STM-1#1 containing 140 Mbit/s CMI 2^23-1
PRBS, to the I/P of the STM-4 Tributary under test and confirm that the signal is
alarm & error free at the O/P port for STM-1#1.
3 View the Active Alarms for the STM-4 Tributary under test and confirm that the
4 Repeat for STM-1#2, STM-1#3, and STM-1#4.
the ODF and at the equipment face. Also GENTLY tap each unit in the shelf. No

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
16.5.6 Testing an STM-4 VC4-4c/v Tributary
16.5.6.1 Setup HOVC Config Traffic Mode for VC4 c/v Conversion
1 Select Connections Connections from the Top Level Menu to display the Cross
Connection Details screen.
2 Select the required slot (STM 4 C to V) from the Source Card field combo box.
3 Select Card and then HOVC Config from pull down menu to access the HOVC
Config screen. See Figure below.
4 If the VC4 C to V Optimux card was selected correctly in the Cross Connection
Details screen the Traffic Mode tab in the HOVC Config screen will be
selectable. Click on the Traffic Mode tab. The contents of this tab are shown in
the above figure.
5 In the Traffic Mode tab change the VC4 C to V Mode option (default) to
Conversion Mode using the VC4 C to V Mode combo box.
6 Click Apply.
7 OK the Qualifier box.
8 Press Cancel to revert to Cross Connection Details screen.
9 Select Close from File option in Cross Connection Details screen to revert to
the Top Level Menu.
16.5.6.2 Perform STM-4 VC4-4c/v Test

Note: Use an STM-4 Analyser set for AU4 Concatenated Bulk Contiguous operation.
The VC-4 signals for STM-1#1, STM-1#2, STM-1#3, & STM-1#4 contains 140 Mbit/s
CMI 2^23-1 PRBS.
1 Cross connect all VC-4 Channels from Generic Trib 1 (or Generic Trib) to Line
West or Line East at the VC-4 level.
2 With Line West and Line East looped back via suitable test cables, apply an
STM-4 VC4-4c signal to the I/P of the STM-4 VC4-4c/v Tributary under test and
confirm that the signal is alarm & error free at the O/P port.
3 View the Active Alarms for the STM-4 VC4-4c/v Tributary under test and confirm
that the appropriate Port Loss of Input alarm has cleared.
the ODF and at the equipment face. Also GENTLY tap each unit in the shelf. No

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
16.5.7 Testing a 34Mbit/s Transmux

Note: Use a Structured 34Mbit/s Signal.
1 Cross connect all sixteen ports of the 34Mbit/s Transmux under test to Line
West or Line East at the VC-12 level
2 With Line West & Line East looped back apply a 34 Mbit/s HDB3 signal
containing a Structured payload to the I/P of the Transmux under and monitor
at its O/P. The Transmitter and Receiver should be Coupled and use the
Internal Clock Sync. Results should be set to display bit errors.
3 View the Alarms for the 34 Mbit/s Transmux under test and confirm that the
Loss of Input alarm has cleared.
4 From the Transmitter apply a 2 Mbit/s 2^15-1 PRBS test signal into each
channel in turn and confirm that an error free signal is indicated on the Receiver
for the same channel.
the DDF and at the equipment face. Also GENTLY tap each unit (including
LTUs) in the shelf. No induced alarms or errors shall be recorded in either case.
Confirm by interrogating the Event Logs.
16.6 Packetspan Card Tests

If Tributary cards other than PDH & STM-n are fitted, then carry out the tests specified
in the relevant Commissioning Procedures.
16.7 Core Card Protection Test

THIS TEST IS ONLY TO BE CARRIED OUT ON NEW SHELVES EQUIPPED WITH
CORE CARDS AND ON A ONCE PER SHELF BASIS. THE TEST IS NOT
REPEATED FOR EACH TRIBUTARY CARD OR TYPE FITTED TO THE SHELF.
1 With the conditions still set up from one of the Loss Of Signal Alarm And Error
Free Check tests confirm that the Error Detector displays an error free signal.
2 Select the Core A card SWITCH module, right click & from the drop-down menu
select option Core Card Protection.
3 From the Core Card Protection screen, check that the Protection state displays
Switch A Selected.
4 Select the Forced Switch to B option, then Apply & OK to confirm.
5 After a few seconds, verify that the Protection State is Forced Switch to B.
Select the Clear option then Apply & OK to confirm.
6 The Protection State will change to Switch B Selected, select Cancel to return
to the main screen.
7 Now unplug the Core B card from the shelf.
8 Confirm that the test signal, after an initial burst of errors resumes error free
operation.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
9 Select the Core A card SWITCH module, right click & from the drop-down menu
select option Core Card Protection.
10 Confirm that the Protection State is Autonomous Switch to A, Core A is the

Worker unit again.
11 Replace the Protection Core B card, confirm that the test signal, after an initial
burst of errors resumes error free operation.
16.8 Equipment protection
16.8.1 2Mbit/s 1:1 Core Tributary Protection

Note: The CORE TRIB B (Protection) unit in slot S1_05 is the 64x2Mbit/s Protection
card for the 64x2Mb/s CORE TRIB A Tributary card in slot S1_06.
Note: 2Mb/s 1:1 Core Trib protection does not require configuring, it is automatically
provided as part of the Core card Protection scheme.
1 With the conditions still set up from the Loss Of Signal Alarm And Error Free
Check tests confirm that the Error Detector displays an error free signal.
2 Remove the CORE TRIB A unit. Check there is an initial burst of errors followed
by normal error-free operation.
3 Re-fit the CORE TRIB A unit.
4 From the CORE TRIB B (Protection) unit select path: Switch®Core Card
Protection
5 Verify that Switch B is selected.
6 Click on the Forced Switch to A button.
7 Then Apply & OK to confirm.
8 Check that traffic is switched back to the CORE TRIB A unit, with an initial burst
of errors.
9 Select Clear then Apply.
10 Verify that Switch A is selected again.
11 Select Cancel to return to the top level menu.
12 Check that normal error free operation continues.
16.8.2 34/45 Mb/s Generic Tributary 1:N Protection

Note: The Generic Tributary cards in this 1:N group must be fitted in slots GENERIC
TRIB 1 (slot S1_01) & GENERIC TRIB 2 (slot S1_02). With the Protection card
fitted in the slot immediately to the right of the card being protected. ie.
GENERIC TRIB 1 (slot S1_01) becomes the Worker & GENERIC TRIB 2 (slot
S1_02) becomes the Protector.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Note: 1:N Protection is available for groups of cards fitted in the Generic Tributary
slots which have an associated LTU position.
16.8.2.1 Configure 1:N Generic Tributary Protection

Note: A Protection Card MUST be configured as such, prior to a worker card being
assigned.
1 From the Main Menu, select: CONFIG®SHELF®1:N Trib Protection
2 The 1:N Protection screen will be displayed.
3 Right click on the GENERIC TRIB 2 unit in slot S1_02.
4 Select path: PROTECTION®CREATE
5 Then from the 1:N Protection screen, select Apply to put Protection on Generic
Trib 2.
6 Press Cancel then OK in the 1:N Protection screen to revert back to the Top
Level Menu.
7 From the Main Menu, select: CONFIG®SHELF®1:N Trib Protection again
8 The 1:N Protection screen will be displayed.
9 Check that the protection card is fitted and is operational for slot S1_02.
10 Select the Worker Generic Tributary 1 card that requires protection: -
11 Highlight the S1_01 position, then select: WORKER®ADD®OK.
12 Select OK to return to the Main menu.
16.8.3 1:N Generic Tributary Protection Test

1 Cross Connections should still be set up on the Trib units, as described
previously
2 Apply a 34/45 Mbit/s PRBS signal to any I/P port of the Worker Generic
Tributary 1 unit, confirm it is error free at the same port O/P.
3 Remove the Worker Generic Tributary 1 unit. Check there is an initial burst of
errors followed by normal error-free operation.
4 Re-fit the Worker Generic Tributary 1 unit.
5 From the main menu select path: CONFIG®SHELF®1:N TRIB PROTECTION
6 Then select Generic Tributary 2 Protection Trib, then right click and select
Protection then Amend.
7 From 1:N Protection screen select Trigger Restoration then Apply.
8 Check that traffic has switched back to the Worker Generic Tributary 1 unit, with
an initial burst of errors.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
9 Select Cancel to revert to the 1:N Protection screen.
10 Select OK to return to the top level menu.
11 Check that normal error free operation continues.
16.9 Maintenance Spares

Maintenance spare cards are to be tested in accordance with the tests detailed in this
specification i.e. Sections 16.1 and 16.7and the associated tributary card specifications
by replacing a worker with the spare.
16.10 Completion of In-Station Testing

1 Disconnect all items of test equipment and remove all cable loopbacks.
2 Delete all TEST cross connections between the tributary cards and Line
East/West.
End of section

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Release 3.1 NE Subnetwork Integration
Chapter 17:
Subnetwork SMA1/4UC Integration
Prior to starting the following tests agree a test path configuration through the Sub-
network being commissioned with the Network Planner.
Confirm that all necessary external cabling (Ext and TRIB Sync feeds, DDF, ODF,
Comms etc.) is in place.
It is assumed that test paths will be 2 Mbit/s but if Tributary card equipping cannot
support this then STM-1, 140 Mbit/s or 34 Mbit/s test paths may be utilised and the test
signal altered accordingly.
The tests assume a ring configuration (See Ring A Figure 17-1) and that testing will
start from the first NE moving to the next NE in the East to West direction. If a Gateway
NE is part of the Sub-network then it should be the first NE. In station testing of a NE
must have been completed before carrying out Sections 17.1 to 17.5.
At the first NE in a ring configuration Line West receive optical power levels can be only
be measured following integration of the final NE into the ring.
At subsequent NEs Line East receive optical power levels can only be measured after
all tests on the preceding section and in-station tests at the next NE have been
completed.
Ideally NE Integration should be carried out in conjunction with creating the NE on

MV36 and it is assumed that MV36 will be available for this purpose. If they are not
available then ignore any references to MV36 and use the LCT for configuration.
17.1 MV 36 Communication
The SMA-1/4 Ultra Compact equipment can be managed by MV36/38. Where the Sub-
network is to be monitored by either of the Network Managers confirm that Comms
have been established to the Gateway SMA1/4UC.
On subsequent NEs confirm that Comms are established to the Network Manager as
they are integrated into the Sub-network.
17.1.1 Static Routing Tables

If Static Routing Tables are to be used in preference to the Comms Default Routing
(Turn Left Algorithm) they are to be downloaded from the LCT using the disk supplied or
from the Element Manager via DAT tape.
17.1.2 Comms Configuration

Confirm using the LCT that the Comms card configuration is in accordance with the
Customer’s Network Planning instructions. Ensure that the LAPDs are set correctly
(User or Network) particularly where DCC blocks are required for the correct operation
of SRTs.
If the settings required by the Network Planner for DCCm and DCCr are not the Default
then re-set via the LCT using the following procedure:

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
1 From the LCT Top Level screen select path: Configuration®Comms®DCC

Config®Working. From the resulting menu reconfigure DCCr/DCCm as
instructed by the Network Planner i.e.:
· State - Do Not Inhibit or Inhibit
· Coding - NRZ or NRZI Defaults are in bold type
· Interfill - Flags or All Ones
2 Select Amend for each DCCr/DCCm to be changed. Amend the screen as

required then select OK to return to the parent configuration screen.
3 When all required DCCm/DCCr channels have been amended select Apply &
Cancel then OK to apply changes, it will then return to the Top Level screen.
4 Repeat for the appropriate channels in the Default configuration screen.
Note: Working and Default configuration screens should be set using the
same values otherwise if the Mux Controller goes Off line for any
reason (e.g. during firmware upgrade) Comms may be adversely
affected as the default values will be set when the Controller is
brought back On-line.
Note: The following table shows the Allocation of DCC channels for the
4 x STM-1 Generic Trib cards, and their representation on the
Network Manager.
Table 17-1: Allocation of DCC Channels

Physical Port No. NM Comms DCC NM Comms Port Comms Card Alarm
1 DCCr 1 Lower DCCr
2 DCCr 2 Upper DCCr
3 DCCm 1 Lower DCCm
4 DCCm 2 Upper DCCm
5 If the LAPD settings required by the Network Planner are not the Default (User
for Line East and STM-n Tributaries Network for Line West) re-set via the LCT
using the following procedure:
6 From the LCT Top Level screen select a STM-n module/card slot, then LAPD
Config & Working. From the resulting menu configure LAPDs as instructed by
the Network Planner i.e.:
· Mode - User or Network
· Window Size - 7 or value 0-255 Defaults are in bold

type
· Max Packet Size 1512 or value 0-1545
7 Select Amend for each LAPD to be changed. Amend the screen as required
then select OK to return to the parent configuration screen.
8 Select Apply then Cancel then OK to return to the Top Level screen.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
9 Repeat for the LAPD Default Configuration screen using the same settings.
(The Note. also applies.)
17.1.3 IS-IS Configuration

The Network Planner may require that a number of RAPs and MAs need to be created
for the NE being integrated.
1 From the LCT Top Level screen menu select Config followed by Comms then
IS-IS Config.
2 Select, as required, either Reachable Address Prefixes or Manual Adjacencies.
3 Select Functions then Create and enter the details provided by the Network
Planner. Select OK then OK to confirm changes, then Cancel to return to the
parent screen.
4 Repeat (3) as necessary for further RAPs/MAs. On completion select Apply.
5 Select Close then OK from the File option to return to the Top Level screen.
The Network Planner may also require that the factory default settings for IS-IS/ES-IS
System Configuration and/or DCC IS-IS Metrics require changing.
Screens for amending or resetting defaults for both these items are accessed via the IS-
IS Config menu displayed as in a. Parameters should not be altered unless instructed to
by the Network Planner.
17.2 NE Synchronisation
As a NE is integrated into the Sub-network, Sync Mode, Single or Multiple SETG and
Ext/Trib Sync parameters for the NE are to be configured as instructed in the
Customer’s Network Planning document. Synchronisation details should be
downloaded from MV36 where possible.
Ensure that Ext and/or TRIB Timing sources are connected.
Where the first NE is NOT the Ringmaster then Sync alarms may be present until the
Ringmaster has been integrated into the Sub-network.
17.3 Test Path Configuration

As each NE is integrated into the Sub-network make the cross connections necessary,
downloaded via MV36 where possible, to configure the test paths through the NE, as
agreed with the customer.
17.4 Alarm Configuration

If the Customer requires alarm configurations different to the defaults then they should
be re-configured using the LCT as each NE is integrated into the Sub-network, in
accordance with the Customer’s Network Planning instructions.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
17.4.1 Alarm Amendment Procedure

In order to amend the configuration of any alarms the following procedure should be
carried out using the LCT.
1 Select Fault Management from the LCT Top Level screen then from the
resulting menu the NE Alarm Event Config option.
2 In the Alarm Event Type Config screen, select the Alarm Event type to be
amended then set Alarm Event Class, Inhibit State and Local Indication options
as required.
3 Where a report is to be generated at the NE but not reported to the Network

Manager (NM) then set the Inhibit State to Inhibited otherwise leave at the
default state of Not Inhibited.
4 Where a report of an Alarm Event is not required at the NE or NM then set the
Disable State to Disabled otherwise leave at the default state of Not Disabled.
5 Select Apply to down load to the SMA1/4UC. Select Cancel to return to the Top
Level screen when all alarms have been amended.
17.5 Alarm Reports to Network Manager

During the following tests a number of SMA1/4UC alarms will be generated at the NE
under test and adjacent NEs. Confirm with the Network Manager operator, as each NE
is integrated, that these alarms were reported and cleared correctly. If considered
necessary, alarms may be generated by altering the Inversion States of inactive alarms
at the NE under test and confirming correct alarm reporting and clearing sequence.
The operation of any SMA1/4UC User Alarm utilised to monitor the Fault/No, Fault
State of equipment not under direct Network Manager control, is to be confirmed by
introducing or simulating a fault condition, on the alarm cable connected to the
equipment being monitored. Confirm that the correct User Alarm is reported to MV36,
& confirm with the Network Manager Operator that relevant alarms are being displayed
on both the Individual Cards and Element Manager Real Time Monitor.
17.6 Receive Optical Power
17.6.1 Dual Fibre Operation

1 At the preceding NE, ensuring the optical connectors are clean, connect the
appropriate Tx fibre tail to the O/P port of the Line East card.
2 On the corresponding Line West Rx fibre at the NE under test confirm that the
Rx optical power is within ±1.5 dB of the Launch Power plus fibre attenuation
(where known). The minimum recommended receive levels for commissioning is
as follows:
Note: It may be necessary to operate the upper switch on the optical card at
the transmitting end for at least 12 seconds to energise the laser.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Table 17-2: Unit /Wavelength and Power Levels

UNIT DESCRIPTION WAVELENGTH ID MAX I/P LEVEL MIN I/P LEVEL
STM-1 Intra-Office 1310 nm I-1.1 -8.0 dBm -23.0 dBm
STM-1 Short Haul 1310 nm S-1.1 -8.0 dBm -28.0 dBm
1310 nm L-1.1
STM-1 Long Haul -10.0 dBm -34.0 dBm
1550 nm L-1.2
STM-4 Intra-Office 1310 nm I-4.1 -8.0 dBm -23.0 dBm
STM-4 Short Haul 1310 nm S-4.1
1310 nm L-4.1 -8.0 dBm -28.0 dBm

STM-4 Long Haul
1550 nm L-4.2
3 Connect the Rx fibre tail, via any system attenuator where specified by the
Network Planner, to the appropriate Optical I/P port of Line West at the NE
under test. A fixed (Diamond) 5 or 10dB attenuator, as required, is to be fitted to
STM-4 1550nm interfaces if the Receive level is greater than the appropriate
MAX I/P Level in the table.
Note: Repeat (1) to (3) for the return fibre, from Line West, at the NE under
test, to Line East at the preceding NE.
17.6.2 Single Fibre Operation

Refer to Figure 17-2 to Figure 17-5 for methods of Single Fibre Operation.
It is essential that all optical connections to optical couplers are inspected and
cleaned.
1 At the preceding NE connect the appropriate fibre to the Common connector of

the Optical Coupler unit provided and for Contra-directional SFW connect Line
East optical O/P and I/P to the correct Coupler ports.
2 For Co-directional SFW, connect both Line East optical O/Ps to the correct
Coupler ports.
3 At the NE under test, connect the corresponding fibre to the Common

connector of the Optical Coupler provided and for Contra-directional SFW
connect the Optical O/P of Line West to the correct Coupler port.
4 For Co-directional SFW connect one Coupler O/P to the correct Line West
Optical I/P and the other to the optical power meter.
5 With the optical meter set for the correct wavelength confirm that the Rx optical
power at the appropriate Coupler O/P is within ±1.5 dB of the Launch Power
plus fibre attenuation (where known) plus 3dB penalty for Coupler loss. The
maximum & minimum recommended receive levels for commissioning is given
in the following table.
6 For Co-directional SFW repeat on the second Coupler O/P.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
7 Connect the correct Coupler port, via any system attenuator where required, to
the Optical I/P port of Line West at the NE under test. A fixed (Diamond) 5 or
10dB attenuator, as required, is to be fitted to STM-4 1550nm interfaces.
8 Repeat for the return direction, from Line West, at the NE under test, to Line
East at the preceding NE.
9 When fibres for both directions of transmission have been connected, confirm
that the Loss of Signal alarms clear at both ends. Any unexpected alarms
should be investigated and cleared.
Table 17-3: Unit/Management Type Power Levels

MANAGEMENT MAX I/P MIN I/P
UNIT DESCRIPTION LEVEL
TYPE LEVEL
STM-1 Long Haul Int SFW 1310/1310nm Tx/Rx -21.0

L-1.1 -8.0 dBm
(Contra/Co) dBm
STM-1 Long Haul Int SFW 1310/1550nm Tx/Rx
L-1.1
(Contra/Co) -34.0
-8.0 dBm
STM-1 Long Haul Int SFW 1550/1310nm Tx/Rx dBm
L-1.2
(Contra/Co)
STM-1 Long Haul Non-Int SFW 1536nm Red
L-1.2
(Contra/Co) -34.0
0 dBm
STM-1 Long Haul Non-Int SFW 1554nm Blue dBm
L-1.2
(Contra/Co)
17.7 Error Free Checks

Using the test path configuration agreed with the Customer, error tests are to be carried
out sequentially to each NE in the sub-network under test, starting at and working out
from the first NE. DDF cabling is to be included where appropriate.
1 At the first NE apply a 2048 Kbit HDB3 2^15-1 PRBS signal to the I/P of the first
2Mbit/s port.
2 At the first NE loop all test path 2Mbit/s ports in tandem and monitor the signal
at the O/P of the last 2Mbit/s port.
3 At intermediate NEs, Line East of the NE currently being tested, should be

looped back. On the final NE (First NE in a ring) test paths are to be looped
back at Tributary I/P and O/P ports.
4 Confirm that an error free signal is present at the first NE and no alarms are
present at any NE in the monitored loop. Any alarms should be investigated and
cleared before proceeding.
5 GENTLY agitate the optical connectors on the Optical Interface cards for Line
West at the NE under test and Line East at the preceding NE and confirm that
no alarms or errors are induced.
17.8 STM-n 1+1 MSP Protection

Where STM-1/4 Line or Generic Tributary 1+1 MSP operation is to be configured the
requirement for this will be specified by the Network Planner.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
17.8.1 LINE STM-n 1+1 MSP

In the case of STM-1 and STM-4 line interfaces, a second Core card can provide MSP
protection pairs for each port on the first Core card. However, there shall be no
restriction to this allocation and any pairings shall be allowed for 1+1 Linear Trail MSP.
For example:
· Worker on East/Protection on West (and vice-versa)
· Worker on Core card A/Protection on Core card B (and vice-versa)
· One protection pair/Two protection pairs
17.8.2 GENERIC TRIBUTARY STM-n 1+1 MSP

The cards must be fitted in adjacent slots and must be identical card types. Either Card
can carry the designated Worker port, with the Protection port of the group always being
on the adjacent Card.
17.8.3 Configure STM-n 1+1 MSP

The duplicate path should be configured when the distant terminating end becomes
available.
1 In the LCT Top Level screen select the required STM-n card/port then the path:
1+1 MSP Core Protection®Inter®Line West(or East) then Create. The STM-
n card/port to be protected will be indicated at the top of the Core Inter Card
MSP screen.
2 Set up the MSP parameters as specified by the Network Planners instructions.
3 Confirm details are correct then Apply to the SMA. Close the window via the
Cancel option.
4 On the protected Trib/Line, select the path: 1+1 MSP Core

Protection®Inter®Line West (or East) then select the Amend option.
Confirm that the Protection State is No Request – Traffic on Worker.
5 If this is not the case, Apply the Operator command Force Switch to Worker
followed by a Clear command. Select Cancel to close the window.
6 Repeat the above at the distant terminating end of the MSP protected link when
it becomes available.
17.8.4 STM-N 1+1 MSP Test

This test can only be carried out if both ends of a MSP protected link are available and
set up.
1 Select the path: 1+1 MSP Core Protection®Inter®Line West(or East) and
confirm that the Protection State is No Request – Traffic on Worker.
2 Confirm that the test path is operating error free and that the test signal has
been routed over the MSP protected link to be tested. Re-configure cross
connections as necessary.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
3 Remove a Worker card and confirm that after an initial burst of errors the test
path resumes error free working.
4 Select the path: 1+1 MSP Core Protection®Inter®Line West(or East) and
confirm that traffic is now on Protection.
5 Replace the working card. If Non-revertive MSP is configured confirm that the
test path remains error free. Traffic will remain on the Protection card. If
Revertive MSP is configured then traffic will return to the Working card and a
burst of errors will occur on the test path. If Non-revertive MSP is configured
Apply the operator command Force Switch to Worker followed by a Clear
command. Confirm that after an initial burst of errors the test path resumes error
free working.
6 If Unidirectional MSP is configured repeat the test at the distant end of the
protected link.
17.9 EOW Operation

There is no specific EOW unit on this product.
EOW functionality is provided by an external stand-alone unit (SP52A) which plugs into
the Comms/Aux/Ancillary card.
Where an EOW has been included with the Subnetwork being commissioned confirm
that both way calling and speech is possible between each NE and the EOW
Ringmaster:-
1 Lift the handset and confirm that the Green LED on the EOW card lights and
dialling tone is present.
Note: If the Green LED remains OFF and the Intrusion tone (Two pulses at
regular intervals) is heard press the upper switch (through the hole
provided) on the EOW card. This resets all EOW cards present in the
network. Re-start the process from paragraph (a).
2 Dial the number of the required site (00 for an omnibus call). The Awaiting
Answer tone (single pulse at 2.4second intervals) will be present until the call is
answered.
3 An incoming selective call will cause the Green LED to flash. An incoming
omnibus call will cause the Green and Yellow LEDs to flash. The buzzer will
sound in both cases.
4 Answer an incoming call by lifting the handset. The Green LED will light
permanently and the buzzer will cease.
5 Confirm that two way speech is possible by pressing the lower button on the
EOW card. The Yellow LED will light permanently. Replace the handset on
completion.
17.10 Power failure Test

1 With the same test set-up as in Section 6.7 disconnect the power from the
subrack.
2 Wait at least 30 seconds then re-apply power.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
3 Confirm that the Mux Controller is On-Line and no configuration data has been
lost and no unexpected alarms are present.
17.11 Completion of Subnetwork Integration

1 On completion of integration tests, disconnect the test set-up, clear history logs,
delete all test paths cross connections and if required clear all Tributary port
Loss of Input alarms.
2 The NM should be in communication with each NE and the Sub-network should

be in an alarm free state. Inverted alarms other than Trib Input Fails should
have a known reason for the failure.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
17.12 Example Subnetwork
Figure 17-1: Example Subnetwork
S IT E “ B ”
W est
N E :A 1 0 2 M b it/s
S M A -1 A c ce s s
( 1)
W e st E a st
N E :A 4
S M A -4
(1)
(2 )
E a st (2 ) PRC B
N E:A2
S M A -4
( 1) W est
W e st (1 )
N E :A 5
R ing “A ” S M A -4
( 2) E a st
(2) (2) (1)

N E:A1 N E :A 6
S M A -4 S M A -4
E a st W est E a st W es t
(1)
2 M b it/s N E :A 9 (1)
A c ce ss S M A -1 PRC A E M -O S
W est
W e st E ast W e st E a st
N E :B 1 N E :B 2
S M A -4 S M A -4
(2 ) (1) (2)
S IT E “ A ”
R ing “B ”
( 2) (1 ) (2) (1)
N E :B 4 N E :B 3
S M A -4 S M A -4
E a st W est E a st W es t
(1)
NE :B5 2 M b it/s
K ey (1 ) (2) = F ig u re s in b r ac k ets a re S yn c P rio rities
S M A -1 A c ce ss
W est
= In ter co n n ectio n b etw e en S u bn e tw o rk s
= 2 M b it /s a cc ess f or S u b n e tw or k T es ts S IT E “ C ”

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
17.12.1 Methods of Single Fibre Operation

Dual wavelength SFW operation can be provisioned on STM-n optical links as follows.
Note: Red/Blue SFW is not supported on the line slots.
Figure 17-2: Contra-directional
Using wavelengths of 1310nm and 1550nm travelling in opposite directions on a single

fibre.
Tx Tx
1310nm 1550nm
1310/1550nm 1310/1550nm
STM-n Filter/Coupler Filter/Coupler STM-n
Unit Unit
Rx Rx
For contra directional SFW only, the 1550nm unit is managed as a 1310nm unit.
Two 1310/1550nm universal couplers (1HAW 20045 AAW/ABP/ACG) are required. The
couplers have three ports of which one is a common connection, one is for 1310nm and
the other is for 1550nm.
An additional path penalty of 3dB is introduced in both directions.
Figure 17-3: Co-directional
Using wavelengths of 1310nm and 1550nm travelling in the same direction over two
fibres.
Tx Tx
1310nm 1310nm
1310/1550nm 1310/1550nm
Unit Unit
Rx Rx
Tx Tx
1550nm 1550nm
1310/1550nm 1310/1550nm
Unit Unit
Rx Rx
Four 1310/1550nm universal couplers (1HAW 20045 AAW/ABP/ACG) are required. The
couplers have three ports of which one is a common connection, one is for 1310nm and
the other is for 1550nm.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
A fibre tray, 1HAM 60938 AAS, containing two FC/PC universal couplers is an
alternative for 2x1HAW 20045 AAW used in the above figures.
Figure 17-4: Contra-Directional
Using red and blue wavelengths of 1536nm (red) and 1554nm (blue) travelling in
opposite directions on the same fibre.
Tx Tx
1536nm 1554nm
1536/1554nm 1554/1536nm
Unit Unit
Rx Rx
Two couplers, one for 1536nm Tx/1554nm Rx (1HAW 20044 ABM/ADW/AFG) the other
for 1536nm Rx/1554nm Tx (1HAW 20044 AAU/ACE/AEP), are required. The couplers
have three ports of which one is a common connection, one is for Tx connection and
the other is for Rx connection. The couplers are not interchangeable.
Figure 17-5: Co-directional
Using red and blue wavelengths of 1536nm (red) and 1554nm (blue) travelling in the
same direction over two fibres.
Tx Tx
1536nm 1536/1554nm 1536/1554nm
1554nm
STM-n Uni-dir Rx Uni-dir Tx STM-n
Unit Filter/Coupler Filter/Coupler Unit
Rx Rx
Tx Tx
1554nm 1536/1554nm 1536/1554nm 1536nm
STM-n Uni-dir Tx Uni-dir Rx STM-n
Unit Filter/Coupler Filter/Coupler Unit
Rx Rx
Four couplers, two for 1536nm Tx/1554nm Tx (1HAW 20048 AAD/ACN/AEX) and two
for 1536nm Rx/1554nm Rx (1HAW 20048 ABV/ADF/AFQ), are required. The couplers
have three ports of which one is a common connection, one is for 1536nm connection
and the other is for 1554nm connection. The couplers are not interchangeable.
End of section

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Release 3.1 Subnetwork Tests
Chapter 18:
Subnetwork Tests
The tests described in this Section are only to be carried out over the Sub-network
being commissioned when ALL NEs have been integrated including any appended
SMA-1s / SMA-4s.
The possible topologies for a Sub-network are too numerous to give a method of test for
each possible situation therefore, the simplified diagram of a Sub-network in Figure
17-1(Ring A), is used to create examples for the tests in the following Sections. Actual
on site tests should follow a similar procedure but will need tailoring to a particular Sub-
network.
When creating test paths the TRAIL facility on MV36 should be demonstrated at least
once during test path set-up. Trails could be setup using the LCT or MV36 (using the
LCTs), but only by doing cross connections on a one-per-NE-at-a-time basis.
It is assumed that the Sub-network is being managed by ServiceOn Optical Element

Manager (MV 36) and that the NM is available for these tests as they would be
impractical using a LCT.
During the following tests confirm that communication between MV36 and the Sub-
network are maintained/re-established to each NE.
18.1 SNCP Path Protection

Path protection can only be applied within a ring configuration although the path being
protected can originate and/or terminate outside the ring.
The example test uses VC-12 SNCP protection but it can be adapted for VC-3 or VC-4
SNCP protection by setting up the appropriate type of test path.
18.1.1 Test Path Set-up

1 Create a 2 Mbit/s test path from Site A to Site B via Line East at NE:A1 to Line
West at NE:A4. The path may be created using the TRAIL facility or the cross
connections downloaded individually to the relevant NEs. All cross connections
are to be made at the VC12 level.
2 ENABLE revertive VC-12 protection for the test path via Line West of NE: A1 to
Line East at NE: A4.
3 At Site B loop the test path back on itself, confirm that the path is operating error
free at Site A and the Sub-network is alarm free.
18.1.2 Path Disconnections

1 Confirm via the NM that the test path is operating over the working path (Line
East from NE:A1 to NE:A4).
2 At NE:A4 disconnect the Tx and Rx signals at LINE WEST.
3 At NE:A1 confirm that, after an initial burst of errors, the test path resumes error
free operation.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
4 Confirm that alarms have been reported correctly to the relevant Network
Manager. Acknowledge all alarm reports.
5 Confirm via the NM that the test path is now operating over the protection path
(Line West from NE:A1 to Line East at NE:A4).
6 At NE:A4 re-connect the signals at LINE WEST and confirm that all alarms
reported to the NM are clear.
East from NE:A1 to Line West at NE:A4).
8 At NE:A4 disconnect the Tx and Rx signals at LINE EAST.
9 Confirm that the test path remains error free.
10 Confirm that alarms have been reported correctly to the NM.
11 At NE:A4 disconnect the Tx and Rx signals at LINE WEST.
12 Confirm that the test path displays AIS.
13 Confirm that alarms have been reported correctly to the NM. Acknowledge all
reports.
14 At NE:A4 reconnect the signals to LINE EAST and WEST for normal operation.
15 Confirm that, after an initial burst of errors, the test path resumes error free
operation.
16 Confirm that all alarms previously reported to the NM are now reported as
Cleared. Acknowledge all reports and confirm that the Sub-network is now
alarm free.
East from NE:A1 to Line West at NE:A4).
18.2 Synchronisation Switching

The Network Planners Sync plan for the Sub-network will need to be tested. The PRC
providing the External Timing source to an SMA1/4UC may be supplied via distribution
equipment such as the Siemens NFR 2000.
The tests described use Figure 17-1 as an example in which Sync is provided to the
Sub-network clockwise from NE: A1 with a secondary PRC source available at NE:A5.
The tests will need to be tailored to the individual Sub-network.
During the following tests confirm that Comms between the NM and the Sub-network
are maintained to each NE at all times.
Return of synchronisation to normal operation, after failure recovery, will be affected by

the length of WTR periods.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
18.2.1 Test Set-up

1 Create a test path from Site A to Site B as in 18.1.1.
Note: If the Sub-network is not a ring then protection cannot be enabled and
the test path will show AIS during disconnections.
2 Confirm that the Sub-network Sync Plan is correctly reflected on the Network
Manager and the Priority 1 Sources are in use at each NE. It is assumed, for
these example tests, that Revertive mode is enabled.
3 Confirm that the Network Manager shows an alarm free status for the Sub-
network.
18.2.2 Fibre Disconnections

1 Monitor the test path at Site B and confirm it is error free.
2 At NE:A1 disconnect both the Tx and Rx signals from LINE EAST.
3 Confirm that the test path, after an initial burst of errors, resumes error free
operation.
4 Confirm that Line and Sync failures have been correctly reported to the NM for
NE:A2, A3 and A4.
5 Confirm that the Priority 2 Sync Source (Line East) at NE:A2 and A3 is now in
use and the Priority 1 source is shown as failed.
6 Confirm that NE:A4 is now using Priority 2 source (Ext 1) and that NE:A1, A5
and A6 remain on Priority 1.
7 At NE:A1 re-connect the signals to LINE EAST.
8 Confirm that all NEs revert to Priority 1 Sync Source.
9 Confirm that the alarms reported to the Network Manager have cleared and the
Sub-network is alarm free.
10 Confirm that the test path, after an initial burst of errors, resumes error free
operation.
11 At NE:A4 disconnect both the Tx and Rx signals from LINE EAST.
12 Confirm that Line and Sync failures have been correctly reported to the Network
Manager for NE:A5 and A6.
13 Confirm that the test path maintains error free operation.
14 Confirm that the Priority 2 Sync Source (Line East) at NE:A5 and A6 is now in
use and the Priority 1 source is shown as failed. Confirm that NE:A1, A2, A3
and A4 remain on Priority 1.
15 At NE:A4 re-connect the signals to LINE EAST.
16 Confirm that all NEs are using Priority 1 Sync Source.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
17 Confirm that the alarms reported to the Network Manager have cleared and the
Sub-network is alarm free.
19 If necessary make further fibre disconnections at other points within the Sub-
network. Confirm that Sync switching is correct in each case.
18.2.3 External Sync Source Failures

1 Confirm that the test path is error free.
2 At NE:A1 disconnect the Ext 1 timing source.
3 Confirm that a Sync Fail alarm for Ext 1 is reported to the Network Manager.
4 Confirm that the test path maintains remains error free operation.
Note: There may be two External timing sources to a ringmaster SMA1/4UC.

If this is the case confirm that the Ext 2 timing source is in operation
then repeat b. to d. for the Ext 2 Timing Source.
5 Confirm that Sync Fail Alarms are reported correctly to the Network Manager for
NE:A1, A2, A3, A4 and A4.
Note: If there is no secondary PRC provided, NE:A1 will go into Holdover

Mode and all other NEs in the sub-network will lock to this holdover
clock. If this is the case continue from Section 7.2.4.
6 Confirm that at NE:A1 the Priority 2 Sync (Line East), is in use and the Priority
1 has failed.
7 Confirm that the Priority 2 timing sources (Line East) at NE:A2 and A3 are in
use and the priority 1 sources are failed.
8 Confirm that NE:A4 is using Priority 2 timing source (Ext 1) and priority 1 has
failed.
9 Reconnect all external timing sources to NE:A1.
10 Confirm that the test path remains error free and that synchronisation returns to
normal.
11 Confirm that the Sync Fail Alarms previously reported to the Network Manager
have cleared.
18.2.4 Holdover Mode Test

1 Disconnect all external timing sources to NE:A4 then at NE:A1.
3 Confirm that an Ext 1 (and 2 if two external timing sources) Sync Fail alarm is
reported correctly to MV36 for NE:A1 and A4.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
4 Monitor the test path for a period of FIVE MINUTES and confirm that no errors
occur.
5 Re-connect all external timing sources to the Sub-network.
7 After the WTR period confirm that the Priority 1 timing sources are now back in
use at all NEs in the Sub-network (i.e. Synchronisation has returned to normal).
8 Confirm that the Sync Fail Alarms previously reported to the Network Manager
have cleared.
18.3 Performance Test(s)

If the subnetwork being commissioned is not integrated to another network, then only
perform the Subnetwork Performance Test detailed below.
If the subnetwork being commissioned is being integrated to another network, then only
perform the Integrated Subnetwork Performance Test detailed in section
18.3.1 Subnetwork Performance Test

When all NEs in the Subnetwork have been integrated carry out a performance check
similar to the example test described below. (Refer to Figure 17-1)
1 Create a protected 2 Mbit/s test path from Site A to Site B
2 Loop the test path at Site B and confirm it is operating error free at Site A.
3 Configure Performance Monitoring for a number of points in the Sub-network

e.g.:-
· NE:A4 - STM-4 Line East MS, STM-4 Line West MS
· NE:A9 - VC12 At Test Path O/P Port
4 Enable Performance Monitoring at the NEs concerned.
5 Confirm that MV36 indicates an alarm free status for the network then monitor
the test path for a period of 1.5 hours. No errors or alarms should occur during
this period.
6 Interrogate the Performance reports and confirm that no errors or alarms have
occurred.
7 Disable Performance monitoring at the NEs and on MV36.
18.3.2 Integrated Subnetwork Performance Test

If the Subnetwork being commissioned is to be integrated into an existing network, then
carry out a performance check between the subnetworks. This is similar to the example
test described above, but between Site B & Site C.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
18.4 Element Manager Comms

Where the normal turn left algorithm is being used, MV36 Comms will have been tested
sufficiently during the previous tests.
Where dual Gateways are utilised disconnect the Ethernet connection to the Primary
Gateway and confirm that communications are re-established to each NE via the
Secondary Gateway confirmed.
Where IS-IS routing is used it may be necessary to make disconnections/simulate

failures to demonstrate satisfactory operation of IS-IS routing and resilience of the Data
Comms Network (DCN).
18.5 Completion of Testing

1 On completion of sub-network tests, disconnect test set-up, clear history logs,
delete test path cross connections and clear Tributary Loss of Input alarms as
required by the Customer.
2 The Network Manager should be in communication with each NE and the Sub-
network should be in an alarm free state. Any inverted alarms other than Trib
Input Fails should have a known reason for the failure.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Release 3.1 Standalone EOW Unit
Chapter 19:
EOW Unit SMA1/4 UC
19.1 Installation and Configuration of the Unit
19.1.1 Installation Procedure

The EOW is supplied with dual-purpose brackets for ETSI and 19” rack-mounting
practices and are factory-fitted in the ETSI configuration. Instructions for converting the
brackets for use in a 19” rack (below) are included in the box, alongside four (4)
M6x16mm slot-head screws.
To convert the EOW for use in a 19” rack:
1 Remove the two (2) Pozi screws that fix the bracket to the side panel.
2 Flip the bracket 180° on its short axis so that the face of the ETSI flange points
inward;
3 Flip the bracket 180° on its long axis so the face of the 19” flange points
outward;
4 Re-insert the two (2) Pozi™ screws that fix the bracket to the side panel.
5 Repeat for the other bracket.
6 Mount the EOW in the rack and secure tightly with the four (4) M6x16mm slot-
head screws.
7 Connect the Protective Earth Connection of the EOW to a suitable earth point
on the rack.
8 Connect the network ports (East and West) to the SDH equipment.
9 Connect the 4-wire port (if required).
10 Connect the relay port (if required).
11 Connect the handset (if supplied).
12 Connect 48Vdc to the EOW via the power connector
The EOW will execute its power-up sequence and should be fully-operational
approximately 5 seconds after the power is connected.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
19.1.2 Configuration Procedure

The EOW is supplied with the following factory settings:
Table 19-1: Factory EOW Settings

Description Value
Unit Telephone Number 10
Unit Operation In Service
Ring Control Mode Slave
RIC Insert Port 1
RIC Monitor Port 1
Audio Block Port 1
Digital Port 1 A-law
Digital Port 2 A-law
4-Wire Port Disabled
19.1.2.1 Configuration via the Handset

The Unit Telephone Number may be set via the handset key sequence:
*11nn
where nn is the Unit Telephone Number in the range 10-99.
Note: If the first keyed digit of the Unit Telephone Number is ‘0’, the operation is
aborted.
Note: This operation will timeout if it is not completed within 60 seconds.
The Unit Telephone Number may be retrieved via the handset key sequence:
*01
The EOW will respond with the value of the Unit Telephone Number as a set of flashes
of the green status LED 3 and as a sequence of audible tone cadences on the handset
The Node Type of the EOW may be set via the handset key sequence:
*12n
where n=1 for Slave, n=2 for Ring Master, n=3 for Fixed Master.
Note This operation will timeout if it is not completed within 60 seconds.
The Node Type of the EOW may be retrieved via the handset key sequence:
*02
The EOW will respond with the value of the Node Type as a set of flashes of the green
status LED and as a sequence of audible tone cadences on the handset
19.1.2.2 Configuration via the Local Terminal

® ®
Connect a PC running Microsoft Windows Terminal (or equivalent) via its RS232
serial port to the Local Terminal port of the EOW. On pressing the SPACE bar or
ENTER key, the following menu is displayed:

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
#################################################################################
#Marconi 1HAL 60518 AAY Version A01.00 P1.00 #
#Status bbbb bbbb bbbx bbbx #
#1) Unit Operation : In Service #
# #
#2) Telephone Number : 10 #
# #
#3) Ring Control Mode : Slave #
# RIC Insert : N/A #
# RIC Monitor : N/A #
# Audio Block : N/A #
# #
#7) Digital Port 1 : A-law #
#9) 4-Wire Port : Disabled #
# #
#A) Send Network Reset code #
# #
#Select Option > n #
#################################################################################
The operator can configure any of the items by selecting the appropriate option. Options
that are not applicable (e.g. configuration of parameters that are valid only in certain
modes) will be displayed without their option identifier.
In general, each choice will display a list of options or configuration instructions. After
choosing an option/configuration value, the menu will be redisplayed with the new
values.
Note: The operator may return to the menu by pressing the ESC key at any time.
The following sections describe the options/configuration values for each of the choices.
19.1.2.3 Option 1 – Telephone Number

The operator is prompted to enter a number
Telephone Number (10-99):

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
19.1.2.4 Option 2 – Unit Operation

The choices are:
1 - In Service (default)
2 - Bypassed
19.1.2.5 Option 3 – Ring Control Mode

The choices are:
1 – Slave (default)
2 – Ring Master
3 – Fixed Master
19.1.2.6 Option 4 – RIC Insert

Note: This value may only be configured for an EOW that is set in Ring Master or
Fixed Master mode.
The choices are:
1 – Port 1 (default)
2 – Port 2
3 – Port 1 and 2
19.1.2.7 Option 5 – RIC Monitor

Fixed Master mode.
The choices are:
1 – Port 1
3 – Port 1 and Port 2
19.1.2.8 Option 6 – Audio Block

Fixed Master mode.
The choices are:
2 – Port 2

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
19.1.2.9 Option 7 – Digital Port 1

The choices are:
1 – A-law (default)
2 – A-law (Framed)
3 – Disabled (all ‘1’s)
19.1.2.10 Option 8 – Digital Port 2

The choices are:
1 – A-law (default)
2 – A-law (Framed)
3 – Disabled (all ‘1’s)
19.1.2.11 4-Wire Port

The choices are:
1 – Enabled –4dBr
2 – Enabled –10dBr
3 – Disabled (default)
19.2 Operation and Feature Description

When the EOW is first switched on, it runs internal diagnostics checks within the boot
EEPROM. On successful completion of the checks, the active application is run
automatically if there is no Local Terminal cable detected or if there is no operator
activity within 30 seconds.
19.2.1 Boot Mode

When the EOW is powered-up with the LT connected, it enters Boot Mode as shown
below:
Local Terminal Boot EPROM EOW B00.00
LOCAL SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD MENU :
1. VIEW SOFTWARE VERSIONS
2. RUN APPLICATION
3. LOAD SOFTWARE

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Enter menu selection (30 sec auto reboot):
Note: If the EOW is powered-up without the LT connected, it immediately runs the
application. See 19.2.2.
19.2.1.1 View Software Version

Selecting option 1 from the Boot Menu displays the following:
Local Terminal Boot EPROM EOW Software Versions :
BOOT SOFTWARE CODE: NO
BOOT SOFTWARE VERSION NO.: B00.00
APPLICATION SOFTWARE CODE: EOW
APPLICATION SOFTWARE VERSION NO.: A01.00
NUMBER OF APPLICATION UPDATES: 1
PLD SOFTWARE VERSION NO.: P1.0
Press space bar to continue
Note: The onboard flash memory may only be written 1000 times before its behaviour
is no longer guaranteed. The number of application updates records the number
of times that the software download function (see 19.2.1.3) has been used.
19.2.1.2 Run Application

Selecting menu option 2 from the Boot Menu causes the Application in the flash bank to
be validated, copied to DRAM and then started. See section 19.2.2 for further
information.
19.2.1.3 Load Software

Selecting menu option 3 from the Boot Menu causes the flash bank to be erased and
the Send function of the terminal emulator to be used to transfer the software to the
unit.
19.2.2 Application Mode (Main Screen)

Selecting option 2 from the Boot Menu gives the messages:
Validating checksum...
Copying application into DRAM...
Application starting now...

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
Followed by the main configuration screen as follows (factory settings display contain
the default values for the unit)

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
#################################################################################
#Marconi 1HAL 60518 AAY Version A01.00 P1.00 #
#Status bbbb bbbb bbbx bbbx #
# #
#1) Unit Operation : In Service #
# #
#2) Telephone Number : 10 #
# #
#3) Ring Control Mode : Slave #
# RIC Insert : N/A #
# RIC Monitor : N/A #
# Audio Block : N/A #
# #
#9) 4-Wire Port : Disabled #
# #
#A) Send Network Reset code #
# #
#B) Restore Default Settings #
# #
#Select Option > n #
#################################################################################
The status of the EOW is displayed as a set of binary nibbles for use with diagnostic
procedures (see 19.3.1).
The operator can configure the EOW by selecting the appropriate option (see 19.1.2.2).
In addition, the operator can send a network reset code by selecting option A. The
operator is prompted to confirm the action:
Send RESET Confirm (Y/N)?
This function forces all EOW’s in the network to their initial state (configuration data not
affected).
In addition, the operator can restore the default settings by selecting option B. The
operator is prompted to confirm the action:
Restore Default Settings Confirm (Y/N)?

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
19.2.3 Normal Operation of the EOW
19.2.3.1 Originating a Call
· If the Green LED is off, pick up the handset.
· If the Green LED comes on, wait for the “proceed to dial” tone and then dial
the number (for a multi-party call dial 00).
· If the Green LED remains off and the intrusion tone is heard, then this is the
first call following power up and all EOWs must be reset by pressing the reset
button.
· If the Green LED is on, the EOW is in use and you will hear the EOW busy
tone. To join this call, press and hold the intrusion button (which causes all
other users to hear the intrusion tone) You may participate in the call whilst
the intrusion button has no effect. If the intrusion button has no effect, the
EOW is either in the originating or awaiting answer phase of a call.
· The Green and Yellow LEDs both flashing and the buzzer silent indicates that
an omnibus call arrived, was not answered within 60 seconds, but is still in
progress. To join the call, lift the handset to listen only, or press the intrusion
button to join the call.
19.2.3.2 Awaiting Answer

You have originated a call and can hear the awaiting answer tone.
· When the call is answered, the awaiting answer tone stops and you will be
able to speak. If you made an omnibus call, you will not hear the other users
speaking unless they wish you to (by joining the call).
· If the call is not answered within 60 seconds, it will be aborted and you will
hear the EOW busy tone. Hang up and try again later.
19.2.3.3 Receiving a Selective Call

The buzzer sounds for a selective call, the Green LED flashes and the Yellow LED will
be off. You have 60-seconds to answer the call.
· Lift the handset. The buzzer will stop and Green LED will light permanently.
You can now talk to the caller.
· If the handset was off-hook when the selective call arrived, replace it on-hook
and proceed as above.
19.2.3.4 Receiving a Multiparty Call

Within 60 seconds of call arriving, the buzzer sounds for a multiparty call and both
Green and Yellow LEDs will flash.
· Lift the handset. The buzzer will stop, the Green LED will light the Yellow LED
will continue to flash. You can now listen to the caller and any other users who
have established a speaking connection.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
· If the handset was off-hook when the multi-party call arrived, replace it and
then proceed as above.
If more than 60 seconds has elapsed since the call arrived, the Green and Yellow LEDs
will be flashing but the buzzer will have silenced. This means that an omnibus call
arrived, was not answered at this location within 60 seconds, but is still in progress (it
was answered elsewhere). You can join the call to listen by picking up the handset.
19.2.3.5 Speaking in an Omnibus Call
· If you want to speak in an omnibus call, press the intrude button. The yellow
LED will light permanently.
When you no longer wish to speak, then:
· If you wish to continue just listening, press the intrude button. The Yellow LED
will flash and anything that you say will not be heard by other parties to the
call. You can toggle between listen only and talk by pressing the intrude
button.
· If you wish to leave the call, replace the handset.
Note: An omnibus call does not end until the call originator hangs up, or until the EOW
network is reset.
19.2.3.6 Additional Calls

If have reached the conversation phase of a selective call and you wish to include a
third party, then:
· Momentarily press the intrude button. The Yellow LED will light, the speech
connection will be temporarily halted and you will hear the proceed to dial
tone. Dial the number of the third party.
Note: If the call is not answered within 60 seconds, it will be aborted and the Yellow
LED will go off.
The speech connection will be restored, current parties will hear the awaiting answer
tone and when the call is answered, the awaiting answer tone will stop and the three-
way connection will have been established.
· If you change your mind at any time while the Yellow LED is on, press the
intrude button.
Note: Additional users can only be added by the first two parties of a call. If the third
member presses the intrude button, it will have no effect.
19.2.3.7 Finishing a Call
· Replace the handset.
If you originated the call or answered a selective call, the Green LED will go off and the
EOW network will be clear for use by other parties.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
If you answered an omnibus call or were an additional user in a selective call, the EOW
network will not be cleared and the Green LED will remain lit. The other members of the
call can continue.
Note: If a user is holding the network unintentionally (this could happen if a user
making an omnibus call fails to clear at the end of the call, or both parties in a
selective call fail to clear), pressing the RESET button will clear the network.
19.3 Unit Level Fault Finding
19.3.1 Built-in Diagnostics

When the EOW is first switched on, it runs a power-on test that will flash all LEDs,
exercise the buzzer and relay, and produce a call progress tone for approximately 0.5
seconds.
The EOW supports a red status LED that is lit when there is at least 1 alarm condition
on the unit. The local terminal application displays the status of the EOW unit on the
second line of the screen. The status value is updated each time the screen is
refreshed. The status values are displayed in binary as a set of nibbles (4 bits, where bit
1 is leftmost):
First nibble: bit 1: RX synchronisation error on port 1
bit 2: RX clock error on port 1
bit 3: TX synchronisation error on port 1
bit 4: TX clock error on port 1
Second nibble: bit 1: RX synchronisation error on port 2
bit 2: RX clock error on port 2
bit 3: TX synchronisation error on port 2
bit 4: TX clock error on port 2
Third nibble: bit 1: Intrude button is active
bit 2: Reset button is active
bit 3: Handset is off-hook
bit 4: Reserved for future use
Fourth nibble: bit 1: West RIC detected (only applicable when there is a
RingMaster or Fixed Master EOW present in a ring configuration)
bit 2: East RIC detected (only applicable when there is a RingMaster

or Fixed Master EOW present in a ring configuration)
bit 3: Audio Block applied (not applicable to a Slave unit)
bit 4: Reserved for future use
Note: Normal, error-free conditions in a ring configuration slave unit are indicated by
the sequence 0000 0000 000x 110x.

SMA1/4UC LCT Manual
® ®
When the red status LED is lit, connect a PC running Microsoft Windows Terminal (or
equivalent) via its RS232 serial port to the Local Terminal port of the EOW. Press the
SPACE bar or ENTER key to refresh the display.
19.3.2 Fundamental Problems
Table 19-2: Fundamental Problems

Symptom Possible cause Recommended action
Unit does not EOW not powered Check power cable attached
work Check voltage on power cable (20-72Vdc)
Faulty cable to SDH Check diagnostic bits on LT; verify that RX/TX sync and
clocks are present
Hardware problem Power cycle the unit, observe LED flashes, buzzer and
relay activations and listen for call progress tone
Incorrectly configured Connect PC to LT port and launch Windows Terminal,

press SPACE bar and check that it is configured correctly
19.3.3 Operational Problems
Table 19-3: Operational Problems

Symptom Possible cause Recommended action
Red LED lit Low voltage detected Check voltage on power cable (should be -48Vdc)
(-37Vdc to -20Vdc)
5Vdc power rail failure Replace the unit
Watchdog timeout Power cycle the unit
No dial tone Handset not plugged in Check handset jack

Try another handset

Equipment Identity (SMA/PMA, etc) Document Title
Release 1.0 Chapter Title
Marconi Topic 5 1PHA?????xxx (Keyword)

Copyright- Refer to title page Page 315 Issue: ?? enter issue (comment)??

LCT Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

LCT Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Optical Multi Service

List of Figures .............................................................................. 13

1.2 Software Functionality .............................................................. 23

1.2.1 Local Craft Terminal (LCT)/Local Craft Terminal Subsystem (LCTS) 23

1.3 How This Book Is Organised.................................................... 24

Chapter 2: LCT Presentation And Operation ............................. 25

2.2 Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC Window............................... 26

2.3 Menu Selection And Data Entry ............................................... 28

2.3.2 Using the Mouse................................................................................. 29

2.3.4 Error Messages .................................................................................. 30

2.4 SMA1/4UC Management, Control And Monitoring ................. 31

2.4.1 Menu Hierarchy .................................................................................. 31

2.4.2 Error Messages .................................................................................. 32

2.4.3 Warning Messages............................................................................. 33

Marconi Topic 5 1PHA60140AAH

2.5 Local Craft Terminal: SMA1/4UC Window Pop Up Menus ..... 33

2.6 Main Menu Procedure Arrangements ...................................... 33

2.7 Time-outs And Lock-ups .......................................................... 33

2.8 Print Function ............................................................................ 34

Chapter 3: LCT Software Installation.......................................... 35

3.1.1 Type of PC Required .......................................................................... 35

3.1.2 Installation of The PC ......................................................................... 36

3.1.3 Software Installation ........................................................................... 36

3.1.4 LCT Software Installation Procedure.................................................. 36

3.2 Installing New Comms And Controller Software .................... 37

3.2.1 Upgrade Procedure ............................................................................ 37

3.2.2 Software Download (LCT only) .......................................................... 38

3.2.3 View Software Download Header....................................................... 39

Chapter 4: LCT Log in.................................................................. 41

4.2 Local Craft Terminal Screen Presentation .............................. 41

4.3 Log In.......................................................................................... 42

4.3.2 LCT Security....................................................................................... 42

4.3.3 Log In Procedure ................................................................................ 43

Chapter 5: Before Commissioning ............................................. 45

5.2 Pre-requisites ............................................................................ 45

5.2.2 LCT Connection.................................................................................. 46

5.2.3 LCT Software...................................................................................... 46

Marconi Topic 5 1PHA60140AAH

6.2 Start Commissioning ................................................................ 48

6.2.1 Controller Commissioning .................................................................. 48

6.2.2 Comms Commissioning...................................................................... 50

6.2.3 Transport Layer Configuration............................................................ 51

Chapter 7: After-Commissioning Procedures............................ 55

7.2 Remote NE Management .......................................................... 56

7.3 Back Up SDH/Card Configuration Data ................................... 57

7.4 Restore SDH/Card Configuration Data .................................... 59

7.5 Restore IS-IS Static Data........................................................... 60

Chapter 8: Card Pop-Up Menus .................................................. 63

8.2 1+1 MSP ..................................................................................... 65

8.3 Inter-card 1+1 MSP .................................................................... 66

8.4 Intra-card 1+1 MSP .................................................................... 66

8.5 Tributary 1+1 MSP ..................................................................... 67

Amend 1+1 MSP Protection .............................................................................. 72

Delete 1+1 MSP Protection ............................................................................... 74

Core Card Protection ......................................................................................... 75

Alarms - Source Active Alarms .......................................................................... 76

Alarms - All Intermittent Alarms ......................................................................... 77

Alarm Inversion .................................................................................................. 77

Analogue Monitoring (STM-1/4Lines Only)........................................................ 78

Set Bank Status ................................................................................................. 81

Marconi Topic 5 1PHA60140AAH

Switch Banks ..................................................................................................... 82

Align Banks ........................................................................................................ 83

Delete Bank ....................................................................................................... 83